Janome PDF

JANOME ELECTRO PRESS
JP-S Series
Operation Manual
Functions
Thank you for purchasing a Janome Electro Press.
 Before using this press, read this manual thoroughly and

always make sure you use the press correctly. In particular, be
sure to thoroughly read “For Your Safety” as it contains
important safety information.
 After reading this manual, store in a safe place that can be

easily accessed at any time by the operator.
 This manual is written according to IEC 62079.
 This controller is in accordance with IEC61800-5-1.

PREFACE
JANOME Electro Press is a servomotor press which can cleanly and quietly perform pressing,
caulking, bending, and other such operations on detailed objects with high precision and control over
the position and load.
In addition to versatile pressing functions, the Electro Press is equipped with various quality control
capabilities allowing you to establish a highly efficient production system.
There are several manuals pertaining to the Janome Electro Press JP-S Series.
For Your Safety This includes important information about safety. Be sure to read before use.
This manual explains how to set up the Electro Press and maintenance
Setup and operation.
Maintenance NOTE
For those who have knowledge of servo press installation and maintenance.
Functions This manual explains functions of the Electro Press.
PC Operation for
This manual explains PC operation for JP-S Designer.
JP-S Designer
PC Operation for
This manual explains PC operation for JP-S SaS System (optional).
JP-S SaS System
Pendant Unit
This manual explains how to operate the pendant unit (optional).
Operation
Note: The specifications of the machine may be modified without prior notice to improve quality.
Additionally, the menu items displayed on the pendant unit and PC may vary from those listed in
this manual.
The descriptions within this manual are based on standard specifications. The menu item names etc.
may vary depending on the model type.
This manual (2017-04 edition) corresponds with the system software V7.0.x and PC software V7.0.x.
To make full use of the machine’s functions and capability, make sure that
you use the press according to the correct handling/operation procedures
Attention that are written in this manual. Do not handle or operate the press in ways
not covered in this manual.
Functions 1 Electro Press JP-S

CONTENTS
PREFACE................................................................................................................................................ 1
CONTENTS............................................................................................................................................. 2
FOR YOUR SAFETY .............................................................................................................................. 6
Response to the EC/EU Directives ................................................................................................... 24
1. BASIC OPERATION OVERVIEW..................................................................................................... 25
1.1 Return to Home Position ............................................................................................................. 25
1.2 Move to Program Home Position (Work Home Position) ............................................................ 25
1.3 Program Run Overview ............................................................................................................... 25
1.4 External Command Runs ............................................................................................................ 26
1.5 JOG Movements (Low Speed Movements During Signal Input) ................................................ 26
1.6 External Control Overview ........................................................................................................... 26
1.7 Program Run Result Output Overview ........................................................................................ 27
2. DATA ORGANIZATION ..................................................................................................................... 28
2.1 Model/Adjustment Data ............................................................................................................... 29
2.1.1 Model .................................................................................................................................... 29
2.1.2 Adjustment Data.................................................................................................................... 30
2.2 Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 34
2.3 JOG Environment Settings .......................................................................................................... 35
2.4 Special Relay/Special Register Assignment................................................................................ 36
2.5 Position Zone Output ................................................................................................................... 36
2.6 Constant Load Movement Gain................................................................................................... 37
2.7 Programs ..................................................................................................................................... 37
3. PROGRAM RUNS ............................................................................................................................ 38
3.1 Program Data .............................................................................................................................. 40
3.1.1 Program Name...................................................................................................................... 41
3.1.2 Program Home Position........................................................................................................ 41
3.1.3 Approach ............................................................................................................................... 41
3.1.4 Probe..................................................................................................................................... 42
3.1.5 Return.................................................................................................................................... 43
3.2 Load Zone Sensor ....................................................................................................................... 44
3.3 Program Sensor........................................................................................................................... 47
3.3.1 Register of Sensor Difference ............................................................................................... 47
3.3.2 Register of Sensor Sum ........................................................................................................ 48
3.3.3 Register of Sensor Value ...................................................................................................... 48
3.3.4 Sensor Values ....................................................................................................................... 49
3.3.5 Example 1: Sensor Judgment (Judgment of Distance between Steps) ............................... 49

3.4 Step.............................................................................................................................................. 51
3.4.1 Drive Mode ............................................................................................................................ 52
3.4.2 Slow Down Load Rate/Stop Reference Position .................................................................. 67
3.5 Step Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 68
3.5.1 List of Setting Items for Judgment Types.............................................................................. 69
3.5.2 Specifying the Judgment Area .............................................................................................. 70
3.5.3 Action on Sensor Results ...................................................................................................... 70
3.5.4 Sensor Types ........................................................................................................................ 72
3.5.5 Differential Sensors .............................................................................................................. 111
3.6 Step I/O .......................................................................................................................................115
3.6.1 Step I/O Timing Chart (Normal) ...........................................................................................116
3.6.2 Step I/O Timing Chart (Step Drive End Input)......................................................................117
3.6.3 Step I/O Timing Chart (Step End Input) ...............................................................................118
3.7 Assigning a Workpiece Serial Number .......................................................................................119
3.7.1 Action................................................................................................................................... 120
3.7.2 Assigning the Work Serial Number ..................................................................................... 121
4. EXTERNAL CONTROL .................................................................................................................. 123
4.1 Control by Relay/Register (I/O Memory) ................................................................................... 123
4.1.1 Specifying Method of the I/O Memory ................................................................................ 127
4.1.2 Expressing Register Data ................................................................................................... 128
4.2 Special Relay/Special Register ................................................................................................. 129
4.2.1 Common Functions (1) Return to Home Position............................................................... 129
4.2.2 Common Functions (2) Errors ............................................................................................ 131
4.2.3 Common Functions (3) Mode and Calendar ...................................................................... 132
4.2.4 Program Running ................................................................................................................ 132
4.2.5 Entering the Work Serial Number ....................................................................................... 138
4.2.6 External Running ................................................................................................................ 139
4.2.7 Monitor Output Function ..................................................................................................... 140
4.2.8 JOG Functions .................................................................................................................... 141
4.2.9 Program Setting Register.................................................................................................... 142
5. DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT (DIO) ..................................................................................................... 170
5.1 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Connectors ....................................................................................... 170
5.2 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Circuit ................................................................................................ 173
5.3 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Settings ............................................................................................. 175
5.4 Digital Input/Output (DIO) Function Assignment ....................................................................... 175
6. FIELDBUS ....................................................................................................................................... 178
6.1 Fieldbus Overview ..................................................................................................................... 178
6.2 DeviceNet .................................................................................................................................. 179
6.3 PROFIBUS ................................................................................................................................ 183
6.4 CC-Link ...................................................................................................................................... 186

6.5 CC-Link (J) ................................................................................................................................. 193
6.6 CANopen ................................................................................................................................... 197
6.7 PROFINET................................................................................................................................. 202
6.8 EtherNet/IP ................................................................................................................................ 206
7. ETHERNET ......................................................................................................................................211
7.1 Ethernet Overview ......................................................................................................................211
7.2 Ethernet Connector.................................................................................................................... 212
7.3 Communication Settings (IP Address Settings)......................................................................... 213
7.4 Communication Specifications .................................................................................................. 214
7.5 Ethernet I/O (Control via Access to Relay/Register) ................................................................. 215
7.5.1 Format for Sending & Receiving Data ................................................................................ 216
7.5.2 Data Send Procedure ......................................................................................................... 217
7.5.3 Function Code..................................................................................................................... 218
7.5.4 I/O Relay Read.................................................................................................................... 220
7.5.5 I/O Register Read (Read Numerical Type Data) ................................................................ 221
7.5.6 I/O Relay Write .................................................................................................................... 221
7.5.7 I/O Register Write (Numerical data write) ........................................................................... 223
7.5.8 Work Serial Number Read (FC: 0501H) ............................................................................. 224
7.5.9 Work Serial Number Write (FC: 0500H) ............................................................................. 225
7.5.10 Write Program Data .......................................................................................................... 226
7.5.11 Read Program Data .......................................................................................................... 228
7.5.12 Write Step Data (0254H)................................................................................................... 230
7.5.13 Read Step Data (0255H) .................................................................................................. 234
7.5.14 Write Step Sensor Data (0264H) ...................................................................................... 235
7.5.15 Save Setting Data (0300H) ............................................................................................... 246
7.5.16 Error Response ................................................................................................................. 247
7.5.17 Ethernet I/O (Examples) ................................................................................................... 248
7.5.18 Example of Programming Register via Ethernet I/O ........................................................ 254
7.6 Result Data Transmission.......................................................................................................... 259
7.6.1 Basic Communication Text.................................................................................................. 260
7.6.2 Result Data Send Procedure .............................................................................................. 262
7.6.3 Function Code..................................................................................................................... 263
7.6.4 Quality Control Data ............................................................................................................ 264
7.6.5 Judgment Type Results Format .......................................................................................... 266
7.6.6 Time-Series Data ................................................................................................................ 271
7.6.7 Quality Control Data (received example) ............................................................................ 272
7.6.8 Time-Series Data (Example of receiving data) ................................................................... 276
8. RS-232C.......................................................................................................................................... 281
8.1 RS-232C Overview .................................................................................................................... 281
8.2 RS-232C Connector .................................................................................................................. 282

8.3 RS-232C Communication Setting (Baud Rate Setting) ............................................................ 282
8.4 RS-232C Communication Format ............................................................................................. 283
8.5 Control by Access to Relay/Register via RS-232C ................................................................... 284
8.5.1 Data Send Procedure ......................................................................................................... 284
8.5.2 Function Code..................................................................................................................... 285
8.5.3 I/O Relay Read.................................................................................................................... 285
8.5.4 I/O Register Read (Read Numerical Type Data) ................................................................ 287
8.5.5 I/O Relay Write .................................................................................................................... 289
8.5.6 Register Write (Writing Numeric Data)................................................................................ 290
9. SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 292
10. GLOSSARY................................................................................................................................... 317

FOR YOUR SAFETY
The safety notes outlined below are provided in order to ensure safe and correct usage of the product
in addition to preventing injury to the operator, other people and damage to property as well.
・・・・・Be sure to follow the safety guidelines detailed here・・・・・
Symbols are also listed alongside the safety note explanations. Refer to the list below for an
explanation of these symbols.
 Symbols that indicate the level of danger and/or damage.

The level of danger or damage that could occur as a result of ignoring these safety guidelines and
misusing the press are classified by the following symbols.
This symbol indicates an imminent risk of serious injury or
Danger death.
Warning This symbol indicates a risk of serious injury or death.
This symbol indicates the possibility of serious injury or damage

Caution to property.
 The following symbols list the nature of the danger and any necessary safety methods to be taken.
Indicates caution must be taken
Take Caution (General Precaution)
Indicates a forbidden action
Never do this (General Prohibition)
Do not disassemble, modify or repair.
Do not touch (Contact Prohibition)
Indicates a required action
Be sure to follow instructions (General Requirement)
Be sure to unplug the power supply cord
Make sure the machine is grounded

FOR YOUR SAFETY
When operating the Electro Press or performing maintenance operations, place this operation manual
within reach so you can look at it any time.
However, safety measures are not limited to those outlined in the operation manuals. Perform your
own risk assessments according to the conditions in which the Electro Press will be used, and take
measures you think will be effective as a result of the assessment.
Danger
Set up safety guards.

Anyone entering the operating range of the press may be injured.
Make sure to install a safety interlock.

Make sure to install a safety interlock which cuts power when someone enters the
operating range of the press.
 Installation Example
• Install the controller within an industrial control panel.

• The safety circuit should be established according to category 3/performance level d.

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Danger
Before entering the safety guards due to something wrong with the Electro Press or
a peripheral device, or to inspect or lubricate the machine etc., make sure the unit is
isolated from any power sources.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock or injury.
If you do work inside the safety guards, perform a risk assessment and establish
"Work Regulations" that follow the items below with thorough planning for safety.
Failure to do so may cause injury.
• The work regulations must cover details of Electro Press operating procedures as
well as signs to be used between operators, and they must be appropriate for the
operation.
• When creating the work regulations, ensure that the opinions of both machine
operators and industrial health and safety specialists are included, and revise and
update the regulations regularly.
When the Electro Press power is switched ON, do not insert your fingers, face,
or any other body part inside the safety guards. Doing so causes injury.
If you are installing two or more Electro Presses, check the serial numbers listed on the
nameplates and make sure to connect the press to the corresponding controller with
the same number. If the press is connected to the wrong controller and the motor
power is turned ON, the ram may move. Before supplying motor power, makes
sure you have the correct unit and controller connected together.
Failure to do so can cause injury.
Refer to “1.1 Nameplate” in the operation manual Setup and Maintenance for details
on how to read the nameplate.
Do not use the press where flammable or corrosive gas is present.

Leaked gas accumulating around the unit can cause fire or an explosion.

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
When transporting the press, attach the eyebolt(s) to the press and lift it with a crane etc.
Lifting without a crane causes injury and/or unit damage.
Firmly tighten the eyebolts so they do not come loose. When lifting the press horizontally
always use two eyebolts.
Also, be careful when lifting the Electro Press as it will tilt.
When moving the press, take care that there is no excessive force applied to the sensors
on the press. Excessive force applied to the sensors can cause damage or breakdown.
 Eyebolt Types
Vertical Horizontal
JP-S0501, JP-S1001, JP-S1501, JP-S2001 M8 M6 (2 pcs.)
JP-S3001 M10 M8 (2 pcs.)
JP-S5001 M12 (2 pcs.) M12 (2 pcs.)
JP-S5R01 M12 (1 pc.) M10 (2 pcs.)
JP-S10T1, JP-S10R1, JP-S20T1 M16 M16 (2 pcs.)
• Vertical
Eyebolt
• Horizontal
Eyebolts
Sensor

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
When transporting the main unit, after confirming the unit’s approximate center of gravity
with the diagrams below, use a crane to raise the unit. The center point of gravity varies
depending on the model.
155
NOTE: Standard specification examples. 100 7
155
98 9
387
155
155 95.5 12 Center of
95 13 gravity
315
Center of
gravity
805
Center of
244
Center of gravity
220
gravity
655
505
455
JP-S0501-00-100 JP-S0501-00-150 JP-S0501-00-250 JP-S0501-00-350
155
97 10
155
155 95 13
93 15
311
Center of
gravity
Center of
241
Center of gravity
219
gravity
655
505
455
JP-S1001-00-100 JP-S1001-00-150 JP-S1001-00-250

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
196
121 15
NOTE 196
• Point of center of gravity for 117 19
308
JP-S1501 is the same as JP-S2001. Center of
gravity
• Standard specification examples. Center of
244
gravity
645
505
JP-S2001-00-100 JP-S2001-00-200
196
126 10
196
125 11
196
124 12
196
123 13
472
439
Center of
gravity
401
383
Center of Center of
gravity gravity
995
Center of
gravity
925
845
775
JP-S2001-00-300 JP-S2001-00-350 JP-S2001-00-400 JP-S1501-00-450

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
depending on the model. 259
156 25
259
NOTE: Standard specification examples.
152 29
259
146 35
388
Center of
Center of gravity
305
gravity
Center of
gravity
238
810
690
570
JP-S3001-00-100 JP-S3001-00-200 JP-S3001-00-300
259
259 159 22
157 24
442
402
Center of
Center of
gravity
gravity
930
870
JP-S3001-00-350 JP-S3001-00-400

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
NOTE: Standard specification examples.
407
261 44
407
255 50
407
250 55 568
496
Center of
Center of gravity
443
gravity
Center of
gravity
1219
1099
979
JP-S5001-00-200 JP-S5001-00-300 JP-S5001-00-400

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
NOTE: Standard specification examples. 365

222 41
365
365 217 46
213 50
Center of
410
Center of gravity
Center of
353
gravity gravity
326
843
743
643
JP-S5R01-00-100 JP-S5R01-00-200 JP-S5R01-00-300
365 365
224 39 226 37
381
Center of
403
Center of gravity
gravity
943
893
JP-S5R01-00-350 JP-S5R01-00-400

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
420
NOTE: Standard specification examples. 250 30
420
250 30
731
641
Center of
gravity
1417
Center of
gravity
1217
JP-S10T1-00-200 JP-S10T1-00-400
465
290 35
465
283 42
504
Center of
gravity
406
Center of
gravity
1089
889
JP-S10R1-00-200 JP-S10R1-00-400

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
NOTE
• Standard specification examples.
• For the center of gravity of Special Specification models, refer to “2.4 Transporting the Press” in the
operation manual Setup and Maintenance. 442
279 13
442
277 15
870
767
Center of
gravity
Center of
gravity
1699
1499
JP-S20T1-00-200 JP-S20T1-00-400

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
Be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet when the unit is not in
use for long periods of time. Dust accumulation may cause fire.
When removing the terminal type power cord, with the breaker for the power supply
set to OFF perform a lockout and tagout, and confirm there is no electricity
flowing to the press.
In order to stop the Electro Press immediately, install an external safety circuit (a
power cut-off via an emergency stop etc.) Install this emergency stop so the
operator can easily use it (place the emergency stop switch within reach etc.)
It is dangerous if you operate the machine without the emergency stop switch within
reach as you will not be able to stop the Electro Press immediately and safely in the
event of an emergency.
NOTE: The safety circuit should be established according to the category 3/
performance level d.
Before performing a run or operation, always check the following:
• Obstacles: Check that there are no obstacles in or around the Electro Press and
its working area.
• Installation: Check that the machine is installed properly, and that there are no
abnormalities with the Electro Press and any peripheral devices.
• Emergency Stop Functions: Be sure that emergency stop is functioning properly.
Operating the Electro Press without performing these safety checks is dangerous.
Do not allow water or oil to come in contact with the Electro Press, control box,
or cables. Contact with water or oil can cause electric shock, or unit malfunction.
IP Protection Rating: IP20 for both Electro Press and control box (Not water-resistant)

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
The special relay signal [Pressing OK] turns OFF when a malfunction occurs.
Setup an external safety circuit by using this signal to shut-down the operation
power supply when a malfunction occurs. Failure to do so may result in loss of
control, injury, damage to the press, fire or subsequent damage.
Make sure to eliminate the cause of malfunction before turning the controller
power back ON. Failure to do so may result in loss of control, injury, damage to the
press, fire or subsequent damage.
NOTE: Wait 30 seconds or more before turning the controller power back ON.
Always make sure a supply power breaker is installed at the power supply
source of the control box.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or unit malfunction.
Be sure to use the unit within its rated current range.

Failure to do so may cause fire or unit malfunction.
Use protective gear such as a helmet, protective gloves, protective goggles, and safety
shoes when installing the machine.
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply before plugging in the connection cords
and cables for the pendant unit etc.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock, loss of data, or damage to the unit.
Confirm there is no dust on the power cord and plug it into the power outlet
firmly.
A cord not plugged in properly may heat up the connector and cause a fire.
Additionally, when connecting a terminal type power cord, with the breaker for the
power supply set to OFF perform a lockout and tagout, and confirm there is no
electricity flowing to the press. Failure to do so can cause electric shock or injury.

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
If disassembling this machine, follow the instructions in the operation manual
Setup and Maintenance, and do not dissemble in any other way other than those
specified. Do not modify the machine in any way.
Disassembly or modification may cause electric shock or unit malfunction.
Make sure to power the unit within its rated current range.
Failure to do so may cause unit malfunction.
Make sure that the machine is grounded. Do not use the machine if it is not
grounded. Insufficient grounding can cause electric shock, fire, unit malfunction or
damage.
When connecting the power cord, with the breakers to the power supply set to
OFF, perform a lockout and tagout, and make sure that charge lamp is OFF.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock.
Do not block or cover the controller’s cooling fan.

The controller is equipped with air vents on the top and bottom. Provide at least
100mm clearance both top and bottom, and around all sides of the controller unit.
Failure to do so may cause abnormal temperature increases or malfunction.

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
If anything unusual occurs, such as a burning smell or unusual sound, stop
operation and turn the power OFF immediately. Contact the dealer from whom
you purchased the press or the office listed on the back of this manual.
Continuing to use the press without addressing the problem may cause electric shock,
fire, or unit breakdown.
When exchanging the battery, always turn the power (motor power supply and
control power supply) OFF and make sure that the charge lamp of the controller
is OFF before proceeding.
Failure to do so may cause electric shock or unit malfunction.
Controller
Charge Lamp
Caution Label
Front Rear

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Warning
 Motor surface temperature
Operate the Electro Press within the range of motor surface temperature of less than 100
degrees Celsius.
Failure to do so can cause electric shock or unit breakdown.
To prevent the motor from overheating, cool down the motor, take longer waiting time or
shorten the loading time.
 Danger voltage terminals
The following terminals and terminal bases will be charged with electricity of AC180 – 250V.
JP-SC0501, JP-SC0501-01, JP-SC0501-11, JP-SC1001, connector terminals: 【MOT-U】
JP-SC1001-01, JP-SC1001-11, JP-SC1501, JP-SC2001 【ACIN】
JP-SC2001-01, JP-SC200-11, JP-SC3001, JP-SC3001-11, terminal bases : 【U, V, W】
JP-SC5001, JP-SC5R01, JP-SC10T1, JP-SC10R1, JP-SC20T1 【L1, L2, L3】
Make sure that charge lamp of the controller is turned off before connecting the motor or
switching the power supply. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or breakdown of
the machine. When the power switch of the Electro Press is ON, never touch the above
connector terminals. Failure to do so may result in electrical shock.
NOTE:【MOT-U】 terminal and 【U, V, W】 terminal base will be charged with electricity
when turning on the operation power supply.
MOT-U
【L1,L2,L3】
ACIN 【U, V, W】

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Caution
Regularly replace the back-up battery in the controller.

Failure to do so may result in malfunction or unit breakdown.
Check regularly that the mounting screws are always firmly tightened (every
three months or 750 hours of use, depending on how often the Electro Press is
in use.) Loose screws may cause injury or unit breakdown.
For a long operating life, lubricate the machine once every 6 months or every 1500
hours of press ON time, whichever comes first from the last periodic check.
Failure to lubricate the machine shortens its lifespan. After lubrication, run the press
full stroke to make sure the internal parts are lubricated.
Make sure to use the recommended grease and to thoroughly remove old
grease before applying new grease.
Use of grease other than the grease recommended can cause breakdown.
Place the machine in a well-ventilated area for the health and safety of the
operator.
Place the machine on a suitable flat surface that can support its weight.
Inadequate installation can cause the unit to fall, overturn or break down.
Use the unit in an environment between 0 and 40°C, with a humidity level of 20
to 90%, and without condensation. Use outside of these conditions may cause unit
breakdown.
Use the unit in an environment where no electrical noise is present.

Failure to do so may cause unit malfunction or breakdown.
Do not drop or jar the unit during transport and/or installation.

This could cause injuries or damage the unit.

FOR YOUR SAFETY
Caution
Use the press in an indoor environment where it is not exposed to direct

sunlight. Direct sunlight may cause malfunction or breakdown.
When attaching jigs, make sure that they are secured properly.
Failure to do so may cause an injury or unit breakdown.
Be sure to check the connections of the cords and cables to the main unit.
Improper wiring may result in unit malfunction or breakdown.
The controller should be installed inside an industrial control panel.

Failure to do so may cause injury or unit breakdown.
Secure at least 100mm clearance on the top, bottom and sides of the controller, and
make sure there is nothing pulling on the cords.
The installation mount should be made of steel and it should be able to support the
machine’s weight and pressing load. Failure to do so may cause injury or damage.
Do not use the Electro Press in an environment that is damp or dusty.

IP Protection Rating: IP20 for both Electro Press and control box (not water resistant)
Perform daily and periodic inspections and check to make sure there are no
abnormalities with the Electro Press or peripheral devices. Additionally, keep records of
the inspections and store them for 3 years or more so that the details can be referred to
for future inspections.
Do not damage or hit the ram at high speeds against the stopper or jig by setting the
wrong model settings.
Mistaken operations can cause injury or damage.

Response to the EC/EU Directives
Declarations of conformity to the EC/EU directives are required for use in the EU area.
We make the following declarations for this product (Electro Press, JP-S Series):
1. Declaration of conformity for the EMC Directive
2. Declaration of incorporation to cover the LVD and MD directives
This is a partially completed machine; therefore the configurations vary depending on the end-user’s
machines and devices. For this purpose, we conduct trial tests and risk assessments using a
representative setup.
In accordance, we request that end-users perform a final compatibility test and risk assessment using
their own complete setup of machines and devices to conform to the required EMC, LVD and MD
directives.

1. BASIC OPERATION OVERVIEW
1.1 Return to Home Position

When executing a return to home position, the ram moves to the 0mm position (home position) at the
return to home position speed*. The encoder is also reset.
As the encoder needs to be reset once the press controller power comes ON, you always need to
perform a return to home position once. Once the return to home position is performed, “Completion of
Mechanical Initialization (Special Output Relay)” comes ON. After that, even if the motor power is cut
off, the position is tracked by the encoder.
If “Completion of Mechanical Initialization (Special Output Relay)” is OFF, a return to home position
operation is required. A return to home position operation can be performed by switching the
“Mechanical Initialization (Special Input Relay)” from OFF to ON. “During Mechanical Initialize (Special
Output Relay)” switches ON to indicate that the press is returning to the home position. Once the return
to home position is complete, “During Mechanical Initialize (Special Output Relay)” switches OFF, and
“Completion of Mechanical Installation (Special Output Relay)” switches ON.
If the return to home position is performed while “Mechanical Initialization (Special Input Relay)” is ON,
the ram moves to the 0mm position.
*Return to home position speed: Approx. 15mm/s (JP-S0501, 1001, 2001, 10T1, 10R1)
Approx. 25mm/s (JP-S3001, 5001, 5R01),
Approx. 7.5mm/s (JP-S20T1)
1.2 Move to Program Home Position (Work Home Position)

Work home positions can be set for each program. To move to the registered program home position,
turn “Go to the Program Home Position (Special Input Relay)” ON.
1.3 Program Run Overview

The operation which from preset conditions performs a series of run operations (namely, the approach,
probe, movement (multi-level), and the return) is called a “program run.” This needs to be set
beforehand using the PC software or pendant unit. With a program run, the press can judge whether
various values such as the load and/or position etc., are within the set range during a movement
(multi-level).
Refer to “3. Program Runs” for further details on program runs.

1.4 External Command Runs
The press has an “External Running” function to make movements with a specified speed and target
position, or with a specified speed and target load. This is different from a program run and does not
need to be set beforehand. However, only constant speed movements are made as this does not have
various movement modes, sensor functions, or result data output functions.
1.5 JOG Movements (Low Speed Movements During Signal Input)

Low speed movements made while an external output signal is ON are called “JOG movements.” With
a JOG movement, an inching operation is done first. An inching operation makes a movement using a
registered short distance. You can exclusively perform an inching operation by briefly outputting the
JOG command. If the JOG command is continually output, a movement is continuously made at the
preset JOG speed while the command is ON.
As this function simply lowers and raises the ram slowly, it does not have various movement modes,
sensors, result output functions that a program run does.
Also note that you cannot make a movement less than the inching settings.
1.6 External Control Overview

The Electro Press (JP-S) series can be controlled by commands from a PLC (Programmable Logic
Controller) etc. via digital input/output (DIO), field bus, or Ethernet.
There are two types of input/output (control) with a PLC:
1. Input/output (control) from a special relay/special register

Commands such as “Home Point Return Instruction” or “Start Program Running” are prepared as
special relays. These functions are pre-assigned to the physical digital input/outputs (DIO) or
fieldbus, etc. From these settings, operations such as a “Return to Home” or a “Program Run” can
be performed through the physical I/O.
2. Input/output (control) from program settings

To see which step of a multi-leveled movement is being performed, you can output “Step
Execution”, output each judgment result, or output “judgment values (numerical values)” externally
via DIO, fieldbus, or Ethernet. Rather than preparing various system functions such as special
relays or special registers, “Program Settings” can be made to allow input and output from the
various places of a program execution.

Digital input/output (DIO), fieldbus and Ethernet are basically used in the same way by assigning
specific functions. However, as the amount of data that can be input/output differs, the functions that
can actually be used differ. For example, a DIO has 17 input points and 16 output points and therefore
it may not be realistic to use a DIO to obtain judgment values. It is more effective to use Ethernet or a
fieldbus to obtain judgment values.
When using a fieldbus, you can access (read and write) the relay and registers on the Electro Press
side by setting the access (read and write) in the same way as you would for access to the PLC
internal relay/register from a PLC.
With Ethernet communication, there are ports and functions for relay and register access (read and
write).
1.7 Program Run Result Output Overview

The following data are results data from a program run.
1. Quality Data
2. Time-Series Data
The content (items) to be output are predetermined and is output to the PC via Ethernet (the data
can be saved to a file with the PC software).
3. Output data from program settings

This data can be obtained with a PLC via fieldbus or Ethernet as stated in “1.6 External Control
Overview.”

2. DATA ORGANIZATION
The data required to operate the press is organized as shown below.
Model/Adjustment Data (Section 2.1)
Digital Input/Output (DIO) (Section 5.3)
Fieldbus (Section 6.1)
RS-232C (Section 8.3)
Parameters (Section 2.2)
JOG Environment (Section 2.3)
Special Relay/Special Register Assignment (Section 2.4)
Position Zone Output (Section 2.5)
Constant Load Movement Gain (Section 2.6)
Program (Section 2.7, Section 3)
Program 1
Program Data
Pressing Step 1
Drive Mode
Step sensor
Pressing Step 512
Program 512
For details on how to set data, see the PC Operation and Pendant Unit operating manuals.

2.1 Model/Adjustment Data
2.1.1 Model
This setting defines the specifications of the Electro Press. This is already set according to the
machine specifications in the factory, and does not need to be changed by the customer.
1. Model Name (Maximum Load)

Setting that decides the model (maximum load and speed)
JP-S0501-00
JP-S0501-01
JP-S0501-11
JP-S1001-00
JP-S1001-01
JP-S1001-11
JP-S1501-00
JP-S2001-00
JP-S2001-01
JP-S2001-11
JP-S3001-00
JP-S3001-11
JP-S5001-00
JP-S5R01-00
JP-S10T1-00
JP-S10R1-00
JP-S20T1-00
You can select from the 17 options above. If a load that exceeds the maximum load value is detected,
“Maximum Load Error” is output. This also affects the stroke that can be selected.
2. Maximum Stroke (Length Specifications)

This is the max. length that the ram can move. If the ram attempts to move further than this length,
“1001 Max. Stroke Error” is output. The selectable stroke differs depending on the max. load.
3. Brake Valid/Invalid
This sets whether or not to apply the brake that retains the ram when the motor power is OFF.
4. With/Without load cell

This sets whether the load cell is present. There are 3 selections available: Pressing/Pulling/Invalid.
If a load cell is equipped (pressing or pulling), the pressing load value can be obtained from the
load cell, and you can use control functions from loads such as “Stop at the setting load” or
“Constant Load”. If there is no load cell, the pressing load is completely unknown. Only operations
specified by position can be performed.

2.1.2 Adjustment Data
This is data that relates to position, load, etc., adjustments.
This chapter explains the meaning of each parameter. For details on changing the setting procedure,
refer to “3. Program Runs” and “4. External Control.”
1. Position Offset
Setting
Parameter Unit Function
Range/Selections
The offset for the position set by the
Position offset value mm
mechanical home adjustment
2. Load Offset
This sets the load offset value and update timing for the load offset.
The load offset value is reduced or added to the detected load value (calibration value)to calculate
the final load value.
Load value = Detected load value (calibration value) + load offset value
Setting
Range/Selections
Offset N Load offset value
Decreased Adjustment:
Subtracts the offset value from
detected load value (calibration
Decreased value) and calculates the final load
Load Offset
Adjustment Adjustment / value
Adjustment ―
direction Increased
Adjustment Increased Adjustment:
Adds the offset value to detected load
value (calibration value) and
calculates the final load value
Additionally, if a load offset automatic reset is performed, a value that makes the end load value zero is
automatically registered as the load offset value.
You can select from the following 4 settings for the load offset automatic reset.
• Invalid
Automatic reset is not performed.
Use this when you want to check load value changes caused by your work environment. If you use this
setting, the load value is affected by and changed according to the installation orientation, jig mass on
the ram tip, environmental temperature, and heat caused by continuous running.
Also use this setting when you want to enter load offsets manually.

• Reset at Return to Home Position
Performed automatically when a return to home position is completed.
Use this setting when you mainly want to compensate for the installation orientation and the jig mass
on the ram tip.
• Reset at End of Each Shot

Performed automatically when a return to home position and a program run are completed.
Use this setting when you mainly want to compensate for the environment temperature and heat
generated by continuous running.
If making a run where there is a load affecting the ram tip at the end of the program run, use “Reset at
Start of Each Shot.”
• Reset at Start of Each Shot

Performed automatically at the start of a program run.
Use this setting when you mainly want to compensate for the environment temperature and heat
generated by continuous running.
If making a run where there is a load affecting the ram tip at the start of the program run, use “Reset at
End of Each Shot.”
3. Initialization sensor adjustment values/ Ram projection length

This is an adjustment value used to define the ram projection length at the home position.
Configure this setting according to the “Home position adjustment” procedure. Refer to the
operation manual Setup and Maintenance.

4. Load adjustment data
This data is used to adjust the linearity of the load cell attached to the press unit.
Use the load adjustment device as an external device, enter the press value (load value) and load
adjustment device value (adjustment value), and perform the correction.
Electro Press
Load adjustment device
Adjustment value
Adjustment value 4
Load value P4
(After adjustment)
Adjustment value 3
Adjustment value 2 P3
P2
P1
Load
Load Load Load Load Load value
value 1 value 2 value 3 value value 4
For example, if the load adjustment points are set at 4 locations, the graph would look as shown
above.
If the actual value detected during operation is between load values 3 and 4, the display load value
(load value after adjustment) is calculated based on a straight line between P3 and P4.
If a value larger than the maximum load value is detected, the straight line immediately before
(P3 to P4 in this case) is extended, and the display load value is calculated.
The more load adjustment points, the more accurate the adjustment value.
A maximum of 7 can be input.
Setting
Range/Selections
No. of load adjustment points 0, 2 – 7 ― No. of load adjustment data
Load value N
Load
Adjustment
adjustment1 N
value
...
Load value N
Load
Adjustment
adjustment7 N
value

5. Absolute Position Adjustment
When pressure is applied to the workpiece, the press installation mount deflects according to this
pressure. This adjustment value is used to automatically compensate for the press installation
mount deflection. Set the absolute position adjustment according to the procedure specified in the
operation manual Setup and Maintenance.
6. Limit Position
Parameter Setting Range/Selection Unit Function

Limit Position 0.000 to max. stroke mm The position limit for step movements.
length If the ram exceeds this position a max
stroke error occurs.
By setting this value, the maximum ram movement can be contained within the maximum stroke of the
press. Use this when you want to limit the maximum stroke movement in accordance with the work
environment, etc. If the press exceeds this position during a run, the run is stopped and the [1001 Max.
Stroke Error] occurs. JOG movements also cannot exceed this position.
Note that the press may overshoot and exceed this setting in certain circumstances. Make sure to set
this value with consideration for the possibility of an overshoot.
Note: If using [Model Type/Adjustment Data Send] in JP-S Designer to transfer model information to
the press, when you place a check only in [Model type information], the position limit is set to the
[Maximum Stroke] value regardless of the current settings.
Reenter the previously set position limit value after transferring the model information if
necessary.

2.2 Parameters
1. Monitor I/O Update Cycle
Set the update cycle for the special register monitor output function.
Select one of the 7 settings below.

1) 50msec
2) 100msec
3) 200msec
4) 300msec
5) 400msec
6) 500msec
7) 1000msec
For details on the monitor output function, refer to “4.2.7 Monitor Output Function.”
2. Result Data Save Mode

Result data is made up of quality control data and time-series data.
Result data is backed up by the lithium battery and is saved for each executed program.
Select one of the 3 options below.
1) Save quality control data
2) Save quality control data and time-series data
3) Do not save result data
If result data is retrieved by communication, it is automatically deleted. Data not retrieved externally is
saved internally in the JP-S.
The result data memory capacity is 490 Kbyte. If result data is continually saved and the available
memory becomes less than 64 Kbytes, “Result Data Capacity Warning (0003)” is displayed. When the
memory is full, “Result Data Capacity Alarm (1009)” is displayed, and program runs can no longer be
executed. If you have set to save result data internally, make sure to retrieve the data before it exceeds
490 Kbytes.

3. Time-Series Data sampling intervals
You can select from the 5 sampling intervals below.
1) 5msec
2) 10msec
3) 20msec
4) 50msec
5) 100msec
4. Differential Sensor Sampling Interval

You can select the differential sensor sampling interval from the following 8 intervals:
1) 1msec
2) 2msec
3) 4msec
4) 8msec
5) 16msec
6) 32msec
7) 64msec
8) 128msec
5. Actions for an Alarm During a Program Run

You can specify the ram operation when an alarm (the 1000 error group) occurs.
1) End Program (default values)
This ends the program and returns the ram to the program home. If the program is set to not
return to the program home, a homing operation is performed.
2) End Run on the Spot
This stops the press and ends the program immediately at that position. You can perform a
homing operation after resetting the alarm. If there is a load affecting the ram, a servo error
(the 2000 error group) may occur.
2.3 JOG Environment Settings

The parameter settings when JOG movements are performed.
Parameter Setting Range/Selections Unit Function

JOG Speed － mm/s Speed during continuous movements
JOG Inching
－ mm Unit distance during inching operations
Distance
If this value is exceeded during a JOG
Max load of JOG － N movement, “JOG maximum load
warning” is output

2.4 Special Relay/Special Register Assignment
There are commands such as “Returning to Home Position” and “Start Program” in the press internal
functions. By assigning these functions to an external control interface (Digital Input Output (DIO)/
Fieldbus etc.), it is possible to control them externally.
For details on the list of functions that can be used, refer to section “4.2 Special Relay/Special Register”
in this manual.
2.5 Position Zone Output

Position zone output is a function to output a signal when the tip of the ram is in the set position range.
Up to 32 points (sets) can be registered.
Set the following three items.

1) Output Start Position
2) Output End Position
3) Output Destination of the Position Zone
If the ram is in the range below, signal output of the position zone signal destination comes ON.
• Output start position ≦ Ram position ≦ Output end position
This signal is sent not only during movements but also during stand-by.
Note: Even if you want to output this signal for a single point, we recommended setting a different
value for “output start position” and “output end position”. If both points are set with the same
value, a signal is sent only when the ram is exactly at the set coordinates, and as a result, the
required output may not be obtained.

2.6 Constant Load Movement Gain
This is gain settings used with a constant load movement. The settings are done by %.
There are the following three gains:
1) Proportional gain
2) Integral gain
3) Differential gain
A constant load movement is controlled by PID control. Based on the target load and current load
difference (load deviation) the gain of each of the following items is used as a coefficient and the sum
of this as the control amount (movement speed):
1) Load deviation
2) Integrated value of load deviation
3) Differential of load deviation
• P-Control (basic proportional control)

This is the basic load deviation for proportional control. The larger the deviation, the more the
speed is increased. When the deviation becomes 0, speed is 0; in other words, the ram stops
• I-Control (integral control to release a constant deviation)

If only using a proportional control, in the end a calculation error (constant deviation) will remain.
Add this error (integral), and if there is still an error, the constant deviation is reduced by making
further movement controls.
• D-Control (differential control to increase variation tracking)

Control is made based on the load deviation variation (differential) to immediately respond to
changes in workpiece conditions.
The gain is a group of these 3 values. Up to 16 groups can be set for “Gain Table No. 1 – 16”. You
need to set this “Gain table number” to the step of the constant load movement mode.
2.7 Programs
For details on program runs, refer to “3. Program Runs” in this manual.

3. PROGRAM RUNS
Generally speaking, the JP-S series makes program runs according to the workflow shown below.
1. Approach Operation (Refer to “3.1.3 Approach”)

(Ram) Lowers the ram at high* speed from the work start
position
2. Probe Operation (Refer to “3.1.4 Probe”)
Lowers the ram at slow speed until contact with the
workpiece.
(1)
3. Step (Refer to “3.4 Step”)
(4) The actual pressing operation.
(2)
Multiple levels can be set for 1 program.
4. Return Operation (Refer to “3.1.5 Return”)
(3) The press moves to the specified return position at high
speed* after completing all steps.
*The speed can be changed for these.
The approach operation, probe operation, and return operation can be enabled/disabled for each
program. Also, parameters such as operating speed and stop timing for each operation are set in
program data.
For example, the diagram below shows a program run with an approach, probe, and a return with only
one step.
Program home position
Approach movement Program operation

Return movement A: Program standby
Approach end position
Probe movement B – D: Program running
Touching position
B: Approach
Pressing
movement C: Probe
Pressing end
position D: Pressing
Program operation state A B C D E A E: Return
Program sensor
Step sensor
Fixed Unfixed Fixed

NOTE: ON and OFF for program/step sensors can be read during program standby.
You can set to have the run with no probe depending on the settings. However, for normal operations
with a probe, use a speed of less than 5mm/s. If you make settings for no probe with sections that the
“Probe” will hit the workpiece in the operation, the impact may cause breakdown.
For no load cell specifications (cannot use a probe as there is no load detecting function), or if pressing
and switching various programs with operations B – E (on the previous page), it can be assumed that
the probe is set to NO for a program after the ram has made contact, as there is no need for the
sensor.
An impact may cause damage to the ball screw, bearing, cam follower (rotation stopper), and load cell.
It may depend on the stiffness, weight of the workpiece or the constant of the spring, however, no
matter what; there is a chance of causing a large impact from making contact at high speeds.
Whenever possible, make contact with the workpiece using the sensor (a movement of less than
5mm/s).
Additionally, there are no difficulties with loads which are smoothly changed, however for changes
which are sudden, there is risk of impact. For situations such as this, reduce and use a pressing speed
less than you normally do.
You need to take special caution against impact with no load cell specifications. Because there is no
load cell, the load cell itself is not damaged by impact. However, because the pressing load cannot be
known due to a lack of a load cell, the impact load cannot be detected and stopped by the function
“Maximum Pressure Over.” For this reason, the ball screw, bearing, and cam follower (rotation
stopping) may take damage. Take extra caution to reduce the speed, and use the press so there is no
excessive pressing load.
 Sensor Function Overview (3 Types of Sensors)

A “sensor” is a function that determines whether the load, position, and other such variables are within
the specified range when a program is executed.
A sensor is broadly divided into 3 categories depending on when it is performed.
• Load Zone Sensor··············· A sensor executed from the approach during a step movement.
(Refer to “3.2 Load Zone Sensor”)
• Program Sensor ················· A sensor executed when all steps are complete.
(Refer to “3.3 Program Sensor”)
• Step Sensor ······················· A sensor executed during a step movement.

(Refer to “3.5 Step Sensor”) The range of the sensor (time, distance etc.) is specified by
parameters.

[Position]
Step 1 Step 2
Return movement
[Time]
Step sensor (1) Step sensor (2)
Load Zone Sensor
Program Sensor
For the values the sensor is based on, set the upper limit values and lower limit values.
• Lower limit value ≦ Result judgment value ≦ Upper limit value: OK

• Upper limit value ＜ Result judgment value: Upper limit is NG
• Lower limit value ＞ Result judgment value: Lower limit is NG
The operation for when the judgment returns a fault can be selected as either “Invalid” or “End
program”. Furthermore, the judgment results and judgment value can be output to the Relay/Register.
If the judgment returned a fault, it can also be output to the relay whether the value exceeded the
upper limit (upper limit fault) or lower limit (lower limit fault).
3.1 Program Data

The data set for each program is called “Program Data”.
The following data can be set as program data for 1 program.
1. Program Name
2. Program Home Position
3. Approach
4. Probe
5. Return
6. Step
For details on the step program data, see “3.4 Step”.

For details on how to change data settings, see the “PC Operation” operating manual.

3.1.1 Program Name
”Program Name” is an identification of programs. Program name is used when programs are displayed
in a list.
“Program Name” itself does not affect any operations, and is only used only for identification.
The maximum program name size is 40 characters (single-byte fonts) (*20 characters for double-byte
fonts).
3.1.2 Program Home Position

The program home position is the position moved to when a signal (the signal assigned in the
“Program home position” function) is input from an external source or after 1 shot is completed. Unlike
the mechanical home position, the program home position can be applied for the each program.
In the following condition, the ram moves to the “Program home position”.
• When the return operation is performed after the final step of the program is completed.
• When “Program home position” signal is sent from an external source.
However, when “Return” (refer to “3.1.5 Return”) is set to “Off”, the program ends after pressing is
complete without returning to the program home position.
Setting Range /
Selections
0.000 – max. stroke Coordinates of the program home
Program home position mm
length position
*The speed, acceleration and deceleration are applied from the “Return speed”, “Return acceleration”
and “Return deceleration” settings of Return parameters. Refer to “3.1.5 Return”.
3.1.3 Approach
These are settings for when an approach operation is performed.
You can enable/disable the approach and make settings such as the approach speed, etc.
If you disable the approach, the press starts immediately with a probing operation.
Setting Range /
Selections
Approach Y/N Valid/Invalid ― Enable/disable Approach operation
Approach speed 0.01 – max. speed mm/s Speed during approach operation
1 – max. 2 Acceleration during approach
Approach acceleration mm/s
acceleration operation (while accelerating)
1 – max. 2 Acceleration during approach
Approach deceleration mm/s
deceleration operation (while decelerating)
The coordinates that the Approach
0.000 – max. operation is completed, and the press
Begin position mm
stroke length moves to the next operation (probe or
step)

Setting Range /
Selections
Maximum load during approach.
If a load that exceeds this value is
Max. Pressure (Approach) 0 – max. load x 1.1 N
detected, a maximum load error
occurs.
Max Load Error
(2007) Performs one of the actions on the left
Action at Max. Pressure
Max Load Over according to the setting when the
(Approach)
(1000) maximum pressure is detected.
End Step
3.1.4 Probe
You can enable/disable, or adjust its speed, acceleration, deceleration, touching load and the limit
position.
Enable “Probe Y/N” parameter when Probe operation is necessary.
Set the “Probe Y/N” parameter to “Invalid” when Probe operation is not necessary. The “Step”
operation begins without Probe operation.
Setting Range
/ Selections
Probe Y/N Valid/Invalid ― Enable/disable Probe operation
Probe Speed 0.01 – 5mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the probe operation
1 – max. Acceleration during probe operation
Probe Acceleration mm/s2
acceleration (while accelerating)
1 – max. 2 Acceleration during probe operation
Probe Deceleration mm/s
deceleration (while decelerating)
Switching standard from Probe to Step.
When the load exceeds this value,
Touching Load 0 – max. load N
Probe operation is stopped, and the
press switches to Step operation
Limit value for the probe drive position.
When the ram exceeds this position but
0.000 – max.
Probe Limit Position mm the touching load has not been
stroke length
reached to the Touching Load value,
limit position error occurs
180 – FFF Register no. Writes the coordinates where pressing
Touching Position (OUT)
1 – 32 Data width started to the specified register
180 – FFF Register no. Writes the load when pressing started
Touching Load (OUT)
1 – 32 Data width to the specified register
Normally for operations with a probe, use with a speed of less than 5mm/s. If “Probe” is set to NO
where there are work sections that will be hit during operation, there is a possibility of malfunction from
the impact.
For specifications with no load cells (cannot use a sensor due to no load detecting function), or for
various program switchovers within one pressing operation, it can be assumed that the probe is set to
NO for a program after the ram has made contact, as there is no need for the sensor.

An impact may cause damage to the ball screw, bearing, cam follower (rotation stopping), and load
cell.
It may depend on the stiffness, weight of the work or the constant of the spring, however, no matter
what, there is a chance of causing a large impact from making contact at high speeds. Whenever
possible, make contact with work using the sensor (a drive of less than 5mm/s).
3.1.5 Return
You can enable/disable, or adjust its speed of “Return” operation.
Enable “Return Y/N” parameter when Return operation is necessary.
Set the “Probe Y/N” parameter to “Invalid” when Probe operation is not necessary. The “Step”
operation begins without Probe operation.
Set to perform return.

Set whether to use return, and other parameters such as the speed etc.
When return is set to “Off”, the program ends after pressing is complete without returning to the
program home position.
Setting Range /
Selections
Return On/Off Valid/Invalid ― Enable/disable return operation
0.01 – max.
Return speed mm/s Speed during the return operation
speed
1 – max. Acceleration during return operation (while
Return acceleration mm/s2
acceleration accelerating)
1 – max. Acceleration during return operation (while
Return deceleration mm/s2
deceleration decelerating)

3.2 Load Zone Sensor
Load judgment is made in the required area (zone). This judgment is made for the whole program and
any interval between driving steps does not affect the judgment.
One set load zone sensor area can be established in one program. Up to 32 zones can be set.
Approach Probed Step 1 Step 2

[Load]
Zone 32
Zone 4
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1
[Position]
Load Zone Sensor Area
[Load] : Judgment OK Range
Zone end position

upper limit load Upper limit fault
Zone 2
OK
Zone end position Zone 1
lower limit load
Zone start position Lower limit fault
upper limit load
Zone start position
lower limit load
[Position]
Zone start position Zone end position

 Judgment timing
Load zone judgment can start with the start timing.
Load zone judgment ends on the following conditions:
• All the steps in the program end ························ OK judgment
• Fault judgment occurs during program running····· Fault judgment
(Overload occurs in any zone of the load zone sensor area.)
• Program urgent stop, emergency stop, error ········ Result up to the point when the error occurred.
1) Inside the sensor area at the point of error ···· OK judgment
2) Outside the sensor area at the point of error ·· Fault judgment
3) Not have reached any zone ······················· Depends on OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area
 Load Zone Judgment Setting Data

• Number of judgment zones ······························ 0 – 32 zones
• In case of 0 (nil) judgment zone ························ Load zone judgment is invalid.
• For consecutive zones N and N+1, the end position of zone N and the start position of zone N+1
are the same.
• Judgment result relay can be set.
• The judgment value can be output to register (0 is output for when judgment is out of range)
• Action can be selected for fault judgment during program running.
1) None (continue)
2) End program

Setting List
Item Contents/Unit Range
OK/Fault when Out of Sensor OK/NG
area.
Action on Sensor Fault None (continue)
End program
Load Zone Sensor OK (OUT) Relay number
Sensor Main
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay number
Setting
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay number
Load (OUT) Register number
Position (OUT) Register number
Start position mm 0.000 – max. stroke
Lower Lim. Load at Begin Pos. mm -max. load – max.
load
Upper Lim. Load at Begin Pos. N -max. load – max.
load
Zone1
End position mm 0.000 – max. stroke
Lower Lim. Load at End Pos. N -max. load – max.
load
End position upper load limit N -max. load – max.
load
Zone2
・・・
Zone31
Zone32
 Result (OUT)
Relay/Register (OUT)
In case of In case of When Out of Sen. Area *1
In case of OK
upper limit fault lower limit fault OK NG
OK ON OFF OFF ON OFF
Fault OFF ON ON OFF ON
Upper limit fault OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
Lower limit fault OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
2
Load (OUT)* Judgment Judgment Judgment 0 0
2
Position* Judgment Judgment Judgment 0 0
1
* According to the out of sensor action.
*2 The value of the first judgment is output

3.3 Program Sensor
The position and load value data are recorded, and the following sensors are operated.
• Difference (Judgment) Sensor
• Sum (Judgment) Sensor
• Value (Judgment) Sensor
Sensors can be set with up to sixteen settings for each program, and they will be executed according
to the order that you specify.
Refer to “3.6 Step I/O” and “4.1 Control by Relay/Register (I/O Memory)” for specifying method.
3.3.1 Register of Sensor Difference

When pressing is complete, you can take the difference between two values and execute Judgment.
The necessary settings for this sensor are listed below:
Settings Notes
Source1 Register Register Number
Sensor Target Value Integer Value
Operation result OUT Register Number
Sensor (Judgment) Result (larger) OUT Relay Number
Sensor (Judgment) (larger) Action None
End Program
Sensor (Judgment) (smaller) OUT Relay Number
Sensor (Judgment) (smaller) Action None
End Program
Operation Result = Source1 Register – Source2 Register

Compare the operation result and the sensor target value and output that result as the sensor
(judgment) result.
• Calculation Result >= Sensor Target Value ·········· Sensor Result (larger)
• Calculation Result >= Sensor Target Value ·········· Sensor Result (smaller)
This sensor is used if, for example, you want to judge the difference between 2 top load values.

3.3.2 Register of Sensor Sum
When pressing is complete, you can take any two logical register sums and execute Judgment. The
necessary settings for this sensor are listed below:
Settings Notes
Sensor Target Value Numerical Value
Operation Result OUT Register Number
End Program
End Program
Operation Result=Source1 Register+Source2 Register

Compare the operation result and sensor target value and output that result as the sensor (Judgment)
result.
• Calculation Result >= Sensor Target Value ·········· Sensor Result (larger)
• Calculation Result < Sensor Target Value············ Sensor Result (smaller)
This sensor is used, if example, you want to judge the sum of 2 top load values.
3.3.3 Register of Sensor Value

When pressing is complete, you can take perform sensor Judgment for any logical register value.
The necessary settings for this sensor are listed below:
Settings Notes
Source Register Register Number
Sensor Target Value Numerical Value
End Program
End Program
Compare the operation result and the sensor target value and output that value as the sensor
(Judgment) result.
• Source Register Value >= Sensor Target Value ···· Sensor Result (larger)
• Source Register Value < Sensor Target Value ······ Sensor Result (smaller)

3.3.4 Sensor Values
The values handled in the register are all integer numbers and the position/load values are displayed in
the following way.
• Position
Position data is shown in longword (2W, 32bit).
Data Range: -999.999mm - 999.999mm

Binary Display: FFF0BDC1 H - 000F423F H
• Load
Load data is shown in longword (2W, 32bit)
Data Range: -200000(N) – 200000(N) (-20t – 20t)

Binary Display: FFFCF2C0 H - 00030D40 H
3.3.5 Example 1: Sensor Judgment (Judgment of Distance between Steps)

In a program consisting of three steps:
The distance from the end position of step 1 until the end position of step 3 is judged. If the distance
exceeds 1.000mm, it will be judged as an error.
Step 1 (Const Speed / Stop at the set load)

End Load: 5000N
End Position of the Step (Step I/O)
Step 1 Register Number：C00 Bit Width：32
Load Hold
Step 3 (Const Speed ・ Stop at the set load)
End Load: 6000N
End Load: (Step I/O)
Step 2 Register Number：C02 Bit Width：32
Load Hold
Register Difference Sensor
Source1: Register Number C02 Bit Width 32
Source2: Register Number C00 Bit Width 32
Step 3
Sensor Target Value 1000 (meaning 1.000mm)
Load Hold
Output Register Number of Calculation Result
Register Number 286 Bit Width 32
(Write operation result: source1 – source2 value)
Sensor (Judgment) result (larger) OUT： 0700
(Operation result > Sensor Value Target)

Set the register difference (Judgment) sensor for steps 1 and 3 and set the sensor target value as
1000 (1.000mm). The operation result will be stored in the register as shown below.
As the relay (0700) is ON, you can judge that the distance has exceeded 1.000mm.
Register
C00 40000
C02 41001
PLC
286 1001
Relay
070 ON
Operation Result
Step 1 End Position： 40．000mm (C00)
Step 3 End Position： 41．001mm (C02)
Distance Difference： 1.001mm (286)
Sensor (Judgment) Result (larger)：ON (The sensor target result exceeded 1000) (0700)

3.4 Step
“Step” is the data for performing the pressing operation on the work. 512 steps can be set in one
program.
“Drive mode” is a type of ram operation (moving and stopping methods of ram) for Step. The “Drive
Mode” needs to be set individually for each step. By setting the driving mode and parameters for the
step, a diverse range of operations can be performed.
Additionally, functions such as judgments and I/O can be added to steps.
[Program]
[Program Data]
[Step 1]
Drive Mode: Constant speed/Stop in the set position
Parameter: Acceleration
Drive speed Step sensor
[Step 2]
Drive Mode: Constant speed/Stop at the set distance
Parameter: Acceleration
Drive speed Step sensor

3.4.1 Drive Mode
There are 9 types of drive modes as shown below.
The moving methods and stopping methods are decided based on the Drive Mode set.
Drive Modes Moving methods Stopping methods

1. Constant speed/Stop at Stop at the set position
the set position (When the set position is reached)
2. Constant speed/Stop at Stop at the set distance (Move the set distance
the set distance from the set position)
3. Constant speed/Stop at Constant Speed Stop at the set load (When the setting load is
the set load movement reached)
4. Constant speed/Stop at Stop at the set increasing load (Load is increased
the set increasing load by the set amount from the set load)
5. Constant speed/Stop
Stop on the event (set relay is turned ON from Off)
on the event
6. Constant Load/Stop Stop after the set time
after the set time (Stop after the set time)
7. Constant Load/Stop at Stop at the set position (When the set position is
the set point Control for reached)
8. Constant Load/Stop at constant load Stop at the set distance (Move the set distance
the set distance from the set position)
9. Constant Load/Stop on
Stop on the event (set relay is turned ON from Off)
the event
From the following page, the details of each mode and setting parameters are explained.
This chapter explains the meaning of each parameter. For details on how to change data settings, see
the “PC Operation” or “Teaching pendant unit operation” operating manual.

1. Constant speed/Stop at the set position
This mode maintains a constant speed, and moves the press until the specified coordinates are
reached. (Previous step) Pressing drive Stop (Next step)
[Time]
Step Start Position
End Position
[Position] Holding Time
[Load]
Maximum
Pressure
[Time]
[Speed]
Drive speed
[Time]

2 Acceleration during pressing
Acceleration 1 – max. acceleration mm/s
(when accelerating)
Speed 0.01 - 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during pressing
Acceleration during pressing
Deceleration 1 – max. deceleration mm/s2
(when decelerating)
Maximum Load Error occurs if the upper
Max. Pressure 0 – max. load x 1.1 N
limit of the load value is exceeded.
Fault: Max. Load Error (2007) Performs one of the actions on the left
Action at Max.
Error: Max. Load Over(1000) according to the setting when the
Pressure
End of Step: Ends the step. maximum pressure is detected.
End Position 0.000 – max. stroke length mm Position where pressing ends
Only the set time stops at the pressing
Holding Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
end Position
Normal drive: After ending the step drive
(after servo motor operation), move to the
next step drive
Step end mode Normal/Connection
Connection drive: Move to the next step
drive at the timing to start decelerating for
the step

2. Constant Speed/ Stop at the set distance
This mode maintains a constant speed, and drives only for the set distance from the standard position.
The standard position is the position where the previous step was completed. If the Distance start
value is set for [Register Ref.], the standard position is not the position at which the previous stage
finished, and it can be the register value that was set for [Reg. Number of Dis. start value].
(Previous step) Pressing drive Stop (Next step)
[Time]
End position of
previous step
Pressing
distance
[Position] Holding
Time
[Load]
Maximum
Pressure
[Time]
[Speed]
Drive
speed
[Time]

Setting
Range/Selections
1 – max. Acceleration during pressing
Acceleration mm/s2
acceleration (when accelerating)
Speed 0.01 - 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
1 – max. Acceleration during pressing
Deceleration mm/s2
deceleration (when decelerating)
Maximum Load Error. Occurs if the upper
Maximum Pressure 0 – max. load x 1.1 N
limit of the load value is exceeded.
Fault: Max. Load
Error (2007)
Performs one of the actions on the left
Action at Max. Error: Max. Load
according to the setting when the maximum
Pressure Over(1000)
pressure is detected.
End of Step: Ends
the step.
Pressing operation distance.
-max. stroke length
End Distance mm Select the start point using the distance start
– max. stroke length
value.
Only the set time stops at the pressing end
position
Step end mode Normal/Connection next step drive
Connection drive: Move to the next step drive
at the timing to start decelerating for the step
End Pos’n of Prev. Select the start position of the stop at the set
Distance start value
Step / Register Ref. dis. drive.
When the Distance start value is [Register
Ref.], the designated value is the starting
Reg. Number of point for pressing. For [End Pos. of Prev.
I/O register number
Dis. start value Step], this value is invalid and the position at
which the previous stage finished is assumed
as the starting point.

3. Constant Speed/ Stop at the set load
This maintains a constant speed, and lowers the press until the specified load value is detected.

[Time]
Step Start
Position
Holding
Time
Stop Reference Position
End Position
Limit Position
[Position]
[Load]
End Load
Slow Down Load Rate
[Time]
[Speed]
Drive speed
1 [mm/s]
0.2 [mm/s]
[Time]

Setting
Range/Selections
1 – max. Acceleration during the pressing
Acceleration mm/s2
acceleration (when accelerating)
1 – max. Acceleration during the pressing
Deceleration mm/s2
deceleration (when decelerating)
Step Drive Limit Position
0.000 – max.
Limit Position mm If the ram exceeds this position a limit
stroke length
position error occurs
Pressing ends at the same timing as this
End Load 0 – max. load N
load value is detected
When the ratio of the current load against
the end load exceeds this ratio, driving
Slow Down Load Rate 0 – 100 % switches to slow driving. (Refer to “3.4.2
Slow Down Load Rate/Stop Reference
Position”)
If the ram exceeds this position, driving
Stop Reference 0.000 – max. switches to slow driving (Refer to “3.4.2
mm
Position stroke length Slow Down Load Rate/Stop Reference
Position”)
Position
next step drive
the step
With load holding, once the registered end load is detected the decent is stopped. However, it is not
stopped suddenly, and depending on the speed overrun is generated. At this time, if the work is stiff
(the ram is bumping up) the load will rise suddenly, an excessive load will be generated, and may
cause damage.
Normally, pressing speed is less than 35mm/s, and just before bumping up against the work piece,
reduce to an extremely slow speed (recommended: 0.2 mm/s). This kind of operation can be executed
by setting “Stop Ref. Pos’n”

4. Constant Speed/ Stop at the set increasing load
This mode maintains a constant speed, and performs pressing only until load of the increment load
value at end is added from the increasing load start value.
The load value at start is (by default) the previous step end load. You can set the load value not as the
previous step end value, but as the register value specified in the Reg. Number of Inc. Load Value by
setting the increasing load start value as “Register Ref.”
[Time]
Step Start Position

Holding
Time
Stop Reference
Position
End Position
Limit Position
[Position]
[Load]
Increment Slow Down

Load Value
at End
Load value at [Time]

start
[Speed]
Drive speed
1 [mm/s]
0.2 [mm/s]
[Time]

Setting
Range/Selections
1 – max. Acceleration during the pressing (when
Acceleration mm/s2
Speed 0.01 – 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
Deceleration mm/s2
deceleration decelerating).
0.000 – max. stroke
Limit position mm If the ram exceeds this position a limit
length
position error occurs.
When a load is detected that represents
Increment load value at an increase of this value from the load at
0 – max. load N
End the end of the previous step, pressing
ends
When the ratio of the current load against
the end load exceeds this ratio, driving
Slow down load rate 0 – 100 % switches to slow driving. (Refer to “3.4.2
Slow Down Load Rate/Stop Reference
Position”)
If the ram exceeds this position, driving
0.000 – max. stroke switches to slow driving (Refer to “3.4.2
Stop reference position mm
length Slow Down Load Rate/Stop Reference
Position”).
Increment Load Value at End value of Prev. Select the start load reference from the
Start Step / Register Ref. stop of the increasing load movement.
When the Increment Load Value at Start
is set to [Register Ref.], the specified
value in the register is set as the start
Reg. Number of Inc. load for the movement.
Register Number
Load Value If it is set as [End Pos. of Prev. Step], the
specified value is ignored and the value
at which the previous stage finished is
assumed as the start value.
Holding time 0.0 – 999.9 sec
end position.
(after servo motor operation), move to
the next step drive.
the step.

5. Constant Speed/ Stop on the event
This mode maintains a constant speed. Operation ends at the timing when the set relay (stop event) is
turned from OFF to ON.
[Speed]
At the timing when the set relay
(stop event) is turned from OFF
to ON, and operation ends.
Acceleration
[Position]
Stop event (set relay)
Setting
Range/Selections
Acceleration mm/s2
Deceleration mm/s2
deceleration decelerating)
length
Load Upper Limit
Maximum Pressure 0 – max. load x 1.1 N If this value is exceeded “Maximum
Load Error” occurs.
Fault: Max. Load
Error (2007) Performs one of the actions on the left
Action at Max. Pressure Error: Max. Load according to the settings when the
Over(1000) maximum pressure is detected.
End: Ends the step.
Relay Both INPUT and OUTPUT relay can be
Stop Event 0000 – FFFF
number referred to.
end position
Normal drive: After ending the event
(after servo motor operation), move to
the next step drive
Step end mode Normal/Connection Connection drive: After ending the
event, move to the next step drive
without waiting until servo motor
completion.

 Example
By setting as “Differential occurs” of “DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.” by the stop event relay, the following
procedure can easily be done (refer to “3.5 Step Sensor”):
• Differential occurs  Drive stops  Drives the next step
To execute the procedure, the following relay numbers should be the same:
• DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.: DIF Sensor (OUT) Relay number
• Constant Speed/Stop on the event: Stop event Relay number
Settings
• DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos
DIF2 Sensor (OUT) Relay number: C000
• Constant Speed/Stop on the event
Stop event Relay number: C000
[Load]
C000 is turned ON at the timing of

differential 2 sensor (OUT)
[Position]
Relay: C00
[Time]

6. Const Load/Stop after the set time
This mode maintains a constant load, and moves the press until the specified time is reached.
[Time]
Step Start Position
Limit Position
Holding
[Position] Time
[Load]
Pressing Load
[Time]
[Speed]
Maximum Speed
[Time]
Setting
Range/Selections
Maximum Speed 0.01 – 35mm/s mm/s Upper limit speed during the pressing
Pressing Load 0 – max. load N Target load
Number of Gain Table 1 – 16 Number of gain table
Time of pressing drive (the time from the
Pressing Time 0.0 – 999.9 sec previous step end position to the pressing
stop)
length
position
next step drive
Connection drive: After ending the step
drive, move to the next step drive without
waiting until servo motor completion.

7. Constant Load/Stop at set position
This mode maintains a constant load, and moves the press until the specified coordinates are reached.
[Time]
Step Start Position
End Position
[Position] Holding Time
[Load]
Press Load
[Time]
[Speed]
Drive Speed
[Time]
Setting
Range/Selections
Maximum Speed 0.01 – 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
Limit Time of Pressing Drive
Maximum Pressing If this is shorter than the time to reach the
0.0 – 999.9 sec
Time pressing completion position, a “Max.
pressing time over” error occurs
Limit Position mm Limit position of pressing drive
length
position
next step drive

8. Constant Load/Stop at set distance
This mode maintains a constant load, and moves the press the specified distance.
The distance’s standard position is the previous step’s end position. You can set the standard position
not as the previous step’s end position, but as the register value specified in the Reg. Number of Dis.
Start Value by setting the distance drive start value as “Register Ref.”
[Time]
Step Start Position
End Position
[Position]
[Load]
Holding Time
Pressing Load
[Time]
[Speed]
Drive Speed
[Time]

Setting
Range/Selections
Maximum Speed 0.01 – 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
0.0 – 999.9 sec
-max. stroke length Distance of pressing
Pressing Distance – max. stroke mm Select the starting point by the pressing
length distance start value.
End Pos. of Prev. Select the start position reference from the
Distance Start Value
Step / Register Ref. stop of the distance movement.
When the Distance Start Value is set to
[Register Ref.], the specified value within
the register is set as the start position for
Reg. Number of Dis. the distance movement.
Register Number
Start Value If it is set to [End Pos. of Prev. Step], the
specified value is ignored and the position
at which the previous stage finished is
assumed as the starting point.
The press stops for the exact set time at
the pressing end position.
next step drive

9. Constant Load/Stop on the event
This mode maintains a constant load. At the timing when the set relay (stop event) is turned from OFF
to ON, operation ends immediately.
[Load]
At the timing when the set relay

Press load
(stop event) is turned from OFF
to ON, operation ends
immediately.
[Position]
Stop event (set relay)
Setting
Range/Selections
Maximum Speed 0.01 - 35mm/s mm/s Limit speed during the pressing
0.0 – 999.9 sec
length
Relay Both INPUT and OUTPUT relay can be
Stop Event 0000 – FFFF
number referred to.
position
next step drive
 Example
By setting as “Differential occurs” of “DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.” by the stop event relay, the following
procedure can easily be done (refer to “3.5 Step Sensor”):
• Differential occurs  Drive stops  Drives the next step
To execute the procedure, the relay numbers on the next page should be the same.

• DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.: DIF Sensor (OUT) Relay number
• Constant Load/Stop on the event: Stop event Relay number
Setting
• DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos
DIF2 Sensor (OUT) Relay number: C000
• Constant Load/Stop on the event
Stop event Relay number: C000
[Load]
C000 is turned ON at the

timing of differential 2 sensor
(OUT)
[Position]
Relay: C000
[Time]
3.4.2 Slow Down Load Rate/Stop Reference Position

This parameter is used in the [Constant speed/Stop at the set load] and [Constant speed/Stop at the
set inc. load] modes.
In order to increase the detection accuracy of the drive completion load, the drive speed is reduced
directly before the target load value is reached (Slow Down Load Rate), or directly before the position
at which the target load is due to be reached (Stop Reference Position).
At the point at which the current load ÷ drive completion load × 100 exceeds the slowdown load rate,
the drive speed decreases to 1.0mm/s.
Furthermore, at the point at which the ram position reaches the stop reference position, the drive
speed decreases to 0.2mm/s.
[Load]
Drive completion
Load A
Slow Down = Load A X 100
Load Rate Drive
Completion
load
[Speed] Stop Reference [Position]
Position
3.0 mm/s
0.2 mm/s
[Position]

3.5 Step Sensor
This is a judgment performed while pressing.
A maximum of 16 step judgments can be set for 1 step.
The press has the following judgments below. You can determine the judgment you want to use by
combining the judgment subject with the judgment range.
Judgment
Judgment Subject Judgment Type
Range
Step
Ram Position 1. Position Sensor (Start)
Start Position
Given Position 2. Load Sensor/Given Pos.
Load
Given Distance 3. Load Sensor/Given dis.
Given Position 4. Peak Load Sensor/Given Pos.
Peak Load
Given Distance 5. Peak Load Sensor/Given dis.
Given Position 6. Bottom load Sensor/Given Pos.
Bottom Load
Given Distance 7. Bottom load Sensor/Given dis.
Given Position 8. Top load Sensor/Given Pos.
Top Load
Given Distance 9. Top load Sensor/Given dis.
Given Position 10. Valley load Sensor/Given Pos.
Valley Load
Given Distance 11. Valley load Sensor/Given dis.
Given Position 12. P-P Sensor/Given Pos.
Peak to Peak Load
Given Distance 13. P-P Sensor/Given dis.
Given Position 14. DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
DIF1 Sensor
Given Distance 15. DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.
Given Position 16. DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.
DIF2 Sensor
Given Distance 17. DIF2 Sensor/Given dis.
Step
Ram Position 18. Position Sensor (End)
End Position
Step 19. Load Sensor・Given dis.(End)
Load
End Position 20. Load Sensor(End)
Given Position 21. Load Path Sensor・Given Pos.
Load Path
Given Distance 22. Load Path Sensor・Given Dis.

3.5.1 List of Setting Items for Judgment Types
Bottom Load Sensor/Given Pos.
Load Path Sensor・Given Pos.

Bottom Load Sensor/Given dis.
Valley Load Sensor/Given Pos.
Load Path Sensor・Given Dis.

Peak Load Sensor/Given Pos.
Valley Load Sensor/Given dis.

Peak Load Sensor/Given dis.
Load Sensor/Given dis.(End)

P-P Load Sensor/Given Pos.
Top Load Sensor/Given Pos.
P-P Load Sensor/Given dis.

Top Load Sensor/Given dis.
DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.

Load Sensor/Given pos.
Load Sensor/Given dis.
DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.
DIF2 Sensor/Given dis.

Position Sensor (Start)
Position Sensor (End)
Load Sensor(End)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Given Distance
1
Origin
- -  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  -  - - -
Start Position /
2
Sensor Begin Pos.
-                 -  -  
End Position /
3
Sensor End Pos.
-                 -  -  
4 Slant Value - - - - - - - - - - - - -     - - - - -
5 Upper limit value                      
Upper limit value
6
at end
-   - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  -  
7 Lower limit value                      
Lower limit value
8
at end
-   - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Action on Sensor
9
Fault
                     
Action on no
10
Sensor value
- - - - - - -     - -     - - - - -
11 Path Type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --  
OK / Fault when
12
out of sensor area
-                 -  -  
13 Sensor OK (OUT)                      
Sensor Fault
14
(OUT)
                     
Sensor Fault of
15
Upper (OUT)
                    - -
Sensor Fault of
16
Lower (OUT)
                    - -
17 Load (OUT)                     * *
Output of the
18
position (OUT)
           - -        * *
19 Relay (OUT) - - - - - - -     - -     - - - - -
Load Increase
20
Value
- - - - - - -     - - - - - - - - - - -
Load Decrease
21
Value
- - - - - - -     - - - - - - - - - - -
* There are 2 types: ENTER (ENT) and EXIT (EXT).

3.5.2 Specifying the Judgment Area
There are two methods for specifying the judgment area, “Given Position” and “Given Distance”.
The [Given Position] method specifies the area start/end positions as numerical values with the
mechanical home point as 0.
The [Given Distance] method specifies the position that will be the origin, and sets the distance to the
starting position and end position from that point. The origin position is obtained from the [End Pos. of
Prev. Step].
Given Distance/ End position of

previous step origin
：Judgment Range
[Load]
Judgment [Position]
distance
Judgment end dis.
Pressing end
End position of
position
previous step
3.5.3 Action on Sensor Results

You can set the action performed after the sensor results are processed.
The following settings can be made:
1. Action on Sensor Fault

This sets the type of action performed for an unsatisfactory sensor result (fault).
Select from [None] / [End program] / [End run on the spot].
If [None] is selected, the press continues pressing.
If [End program] is selected and an unsatisfactory result (fault) occurs, pressing is stopped and the
press returns to the program home.
If [End run on the spot] is selected and an unsatisfactory result (fault) occurs, pressing is stopped and
the press immediately stops at that location. If there is a load affecting the ram, a servo error (the 2000
error group) may occur.

2. OK/Fault When Out of Sen. Area
“Out of sensor area” occurs when the drive finishes before the ram position enters into the judgment
area. Specify in the parameters whether this situation is OK or NG (unsatisfactory).
If “OK” is set, the relay specified for judgment OK output when the judgment is OK switches ON.
If “NG” is set, the “Action on Sensor Fault” for the judgment fault is executed, and the relay specified for
judgment fault output switches ON. Furthermore, neither of the judgment upper limit fault output or
judgment lower limit fault output switches ON.
Driving pressure end

[Time]
Judgment start position Judgment
Judgment end position Range
[Position]
3. OK/Fault on No Top/No Valley

If the load change does not fulfill the stipulated conditions for the top load or valley load judgment, the
judgment values do not appear. In the case of the top load for example, unless a situation such as
“load shifts from raise to lower” occurs, the judgment itself cannot be executed.
Specify using parameters whether it is OK or NG (unsatisfactory) to exit pressing when there are no
judgment values.
If [OK] is set, the specified relay switches ON when the judgment outputs an OK result.
If [NG] is set, the action set in [Action on Sensor Fault] is executed when the judgment outputs an
unsatisfactory result, and the specified relay accordingly switches ON. However, both the
unsatisfactory judgment upper limit output and unsatisfactory judgment lower limit output remain OFF.
Example of when the Top Load/Valley Load do not exist
[Load]
Upper limit
load
Lower limit
load
[Position]
Sensor start Sensor end
position position

3.5.4 Sensor Types
This chapter explains the meaning of each parameter. For details on how to change data settings, refer
to the operation manual “PC Operation” or “Pendant Unit Operation.”
1. Position Sensor (Start)

Judgment of the ram position when the press switches to a pressing operation from the previous step.
Step Start Position [Time]
Judgment value
Lower limit position

Lower limit value
is NG
Upper limit position
OK
[Position] Upper limit is NG
Setting
Range/Selections
Lower limit value of judgment value
0.000 – max. range. Judgment lower limit fault if
Lower Limit Pos. mm
stroke length the judgment value is lower than
this value
Upper limit value of judgment value
0.000 – max. range. Judgment upper limit fault if
Upper Limit Pos. mm
stroke length the judgment value exceeds this
value
None /
End program / Operation when judgment result
Action on Sensor Fault ―
End run on the was “fault”
spot
Specified relay switches ON when
Sensor OK (OUT) 0000 – FFFF Relay number
the judgment is OK
Sensor Fault (OUT) 0000 – FFFF Relay number
the judgment is Fault
If the judgment value exceeds the
Sensor Fault of Upper
0000 – FFFF Relay number upper limit load and is a fault, the
(OUT)
specified relay switches ON
If the judgment value is below the
Sensor Fault of Lower
0000 – FFFF Relay number lower limit load and is a fault, the
(OUT)
Register
000 – FFF Judgment value is written to the
The Load (OUT) number
specified register
1 – 32 Data width
Register Ram position when the judgment
000 – FFF
The Position (OUT) number was executed is written to the
1 – 32 Data width specified register

2. Load Sensor/Given Pos.
Load judgment is performed during the time that the ram coordinates arrive at the [Start Position] until
reaching the [End Position].
For this judgment, both upper and lower limit loads are set for the start and end. The load range for the
intermediate position changes as shown in the diagram below.
[Load]
Judgment OK area
Upper limit load where
judgment ends
Upper limit is NG
OK
Lower limit load where

judgment ends
Lower limit
value is NG
judgment starts

judgment starts
Start position End position [Position]

NOTE
• The judgment value is the load value at the point where a judgment fault occurs.
Setting
Range/Selections
0.000 – max. Coordinates at which judgment
Start Position mm
stroke length starts
Lower limit value for the judgment
Lower Lim. Load at -max. load – max.
N value range at the judgment start
Begin Pos. load
position
Upper limit value for the judgment
Upper Lim. Load at -max. load – max.
N value range at the judgment start
Begin Pos. load
position
0.000 – max. Coordinates at which judgment
End Position mm
stroke length ends
Lower limit value for the judgment
N value range at the judgment end
End Pos. load
position
Upper limit value for the judgment
N value range at the judgment end
End Pos. load
position
Judgment result when pressing is
OK/Fault when Out of
OK/NG ― ended without arriving at the
Sen. Area
judgment start position
None /
End program / Operation when judgment result
End run on the was “fault”
spot
judgment is OK

Setting
Range/Selections
judgment is fault
(OUT)
(OUT)
Register
000 – FFF Judgment value is written to the
The Load (OUT) number
specified register
1 – 32 Data width
Register Ram position where NG occurred
000 – FFF
number is written to the specified register.
The Position (OUT)
The position where the judgment
1 – 32 Data width
ends is written
3. Load Sensor/Given dis.(Start of Step)

Load judgment is performed from the judgment start position to the judgment end position.
For details on the calculation method for the judgment start position and end position, refer to “3.5.2.
Specifying the Judgment Area.”
For this judgment, both upper and lower limit loads are set for the start and end. The load range for the
intermediate position changes as shown in the diagram below.
[Load]
: Judgment OK area

judgment ends
Upper limit value is Fault
OK

judgment ends
Lower limit value

Upper limit load where is Fault
judgment starts

judgment starts
Judgment beginning distance [Position]

Judgment end distance
Distance Origin
NOTE
• The judgment value is the load value at the point when a judgment fault occurs.

Setting
Range/Selections
Reference position for judgment
Type of Distance
Step Start Position ― start distance/judgment end
Origin
distance
-max. stroke length Position of judgment start
Sensor Begin Dis. mm
– max. stroke length (distance from distance origin)
Lower limit value for the
N judgment value range at the
Begin Dis. load
judgment start distance
Upper limit value for the
Begin Dis. load
0.000 – max. stroke Position of judgment end
Sensor End Dis. mm
length (distance from distance origin)
Lower limit value for the
End Dis. load
judgment end distance
Upper limit value for the
End Dis. load
judgment end distance
Judgment result when pressing
OK/Fault when Out
OK/NG ― is ended without arriving at the
of Sen. Area
None /
Action on Sensor Operation when judgment result
End program / ―
Fault was “fault”
End run on the spot
Specified relay switches ON
Sensor OK (OUT) 0000 – FFFF Relay Number
when judgment is OK
Sensor Fault (OUT) 0000 – FFFF Relay Number
when judgment is Fault
If the judgment value exceeds
Sensor Fault of the upper limit load and is a
0000 – FFFF Relay Number
Upper (OUT) fault, the specified relay
switches ON
If the judgment value below the
Sensor Fault of
0000 – FFFF Relay Number lower limit load and is a fault,
Lower (OUT)
the specified relay switches ON
000 – FFF Register Number Judgment value is written to the
The Load (OUT)
000 – FFF Register Number Ram position (distance from the

starting point) when the
The Distance (Out)
1 – 32 Data width judgment was executed is
written to the specified register

4. Peak Load Sensor/Given Pos.
The peak load (maximum load within the range) is sampled between the points when the ram
coordinates reach the “Sampling start position” to reaching the “Sampling end position”.
[Load]
Peak
Upper limit load
Peak load value
Lower limit load
[Position]
Sampling Start Peak load Sampling End
Position Position Position
Setting
Range/Selections
0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling
Sampling Begin Pos. mm
stroke length is started
Sampling End Pos. mm
stroke length is ended
Lower limit of judgment value range.
Lower Lim. Load of -max load – max. Judgment lower limit fault if the
N
Peak load judgment value falls below this
value
Upper limit of judgment value range.
Upper Lim. Load of -max load – max.
N Judgment upper limit fault if the
Peak load
judgment value exceeds this value
Sen. Area
None / End
Operation when judgment result
Action on Sensor Fault program / End ―
was “fault”
run on the spot
judgment is OK
judgment is fault
(OUT)
(OUT)
Reg. Num of Peak 000 – FFF Register number Peak load value is written to the
Load (OUT) 1 – 32 Data width specified register
000 – FFF Register number Ram position when the time peak
Reg. Num of Peak Pos
load value is reached is written to
(OUT) 1 – 32 Data width
the specified register

5. Peak Load Sensor/Given dis.
The peak load (maximum load within the range) is sampled between the sampling start position to the
end position, and judgment is executed. For details on the calculation method for the judgment start
position and end position, refer to “3.5.2. Specifying the Judgment Area.”
[Load]
Peak
Upper limit load
Peak load value
Lower limit load
Sampling start position Peak load position [Position]

Sampling end distance
Distance Origin
Setting
Range/Selections
Type of Distance Reference position for judgment start
Step Start Position ―
Origin distance/judgment end distance
Sampling Begin -max. stroke length – Position where sampling is started
mm
Dis. max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
-max stroke length – Position where sampling is ended
Sampling End Dis. mm
max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
Lower Lim. Load of -max. load – max.
N Judgment lower limit fault if the
Peak load
judgment value falls below this value
Upper Lim. Load of -max. load – max.
Peak load
OK/Fault when Out
OK/NG ― ended without arriving at the judgment
of Sen. Area
start pos.
Action on Sensor None / End program / Operation when judgment result was
―
Fault End run on the spot “fault”
Relay Specified relay switches ON when
Sensor OK (OUT) 0000 – FFFF
number judgment is OK
Sensor Fault (OUT) 0000 – FFFF
number judgment is fault
Sensor Fault of Relay
0000 – FFFF upper limit load and is a fault, the
Upper (OUT) number
If the judgment value is below the lower
0000 – FFFF limit load and is a fault, the specified
Lower (OUT) number
relay switches ON

Setting
Range/Selections
Reg. Num of Peak 000 – FFF Register no. Peak load value is written to the
Register The ram position (distance from the
000 – FFF
Reg. Num of Peak number starting point) when the peak load
Dis (OUT) value is reached is written to the
1 – 32 Data width
specified register
6. Bottom Load Sensor/Given Pos.

The bottom load (minimum load within the range) is sampled between the sampling start position to
the sampling end position, and Judgment is executed.
[Load]
Upper limit load
Bottom
Bottom load value

Lower limit load
[Position]
Sampling Start Bottom load Sampling End
Position position position
Setting
Range/Selections
stroke length is started
stroke length is ended
Lower limit of judgment value
Lower Lim. Load of -max load – max.
N range. Judgment lower limit fault if
Bottom load
the judgment falls below this value
Upper limit of judgment value
Upper Lim. Load of -max load – max.
N range. Judgment upper limit fault if
Bottom load
the judgment exceeds this value
Sen. Area
None / End
was “fault”
run on the spot
judgment is OK
judgment is fault
(OUT)

Setting
Range/Selections
(OUT)
Reg. Num of Bottom 000 – FFF Register number Bottom load value is written to the
000 – FFF Register number Ram position when the bottom load
Reg. Num of Bottom
value is reached is written to the
Pos (OUT) 1 – 32 Data width
specified register
7. Bottom Load Sensor/Given dis.

The bottom load (minimum load within the range) is sampled between the sampling start position to
the end position, and judgment is executed. For details on the calculation method for the judgment
start position and end position, refer to “3.5.2. Specifying the Judgment Area.”
[Load]
Upper limit load

Bottom
Bottom load value
Lower limit load
Sampling start position Bottom load position [Position]

Distance Origin
Setting Range /
Selections
mm
-max. stroke length – Position where sampling is ended
max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
Lower Lim. Load of -max. load – max.
N Judgment lower limit fault if the
Bottom load
judgment value is below the lower limit
Bottom load
OK/Fault when Out
of Sen. Area
start pos.
―

Setting Range /
Selections
Upper (OUT) number
0000 – FFFF limit load and is a fault, the specified
Lower (OUT) number
relay switches ON
Reg. Num of 000 – FFF Register no. Bottom load value is written to the
Bottom Load (OUT) 1 – 32 Data width specified register
000 – FFF
Reg. Num of number starting point) when the bottom load
Bottom Dis (OUT) value is reached is written to the
1 – 32 Data width
specified register
8. Top Load Sensor/Given Pos.

The top load (load value of the section that was first shifted from increase to decrease within the range)
is sampled between the points when the ram coordinates reach the “Sampling start position” to
reaching the “Sampling end position”.
[Load]
Judg. Value of Load Dec.
Upper limit load
Top
Top load value
Lower limit load

Judg. Value of Load UP
Sampling Top load position Sampling [Position]

Start Position End position

Setting
Range/Selections
Sampling Begin 0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling is
mm
Pos. stroke length started
Sampling End 0.000 – max. Coordinates at which load sampling is
mm
Pos. stroke length ended
Lower Lim. Load -max. load – max.
N Judgment lower limit fault if the judgment
of Top load
value falls below the lower limit
Upper Lim. Load -max. load – max.
N Judgment upper limit fault if the judgment
of Top load
value exceeds this value
When the load from the start of sampling
Judg. Value of
0 – max. load N exceeds this value, the press determines
Load UP
that the load is increasing*1.
After the press determines the load is
increasing, the press determines the load is
Judg. Value of decreasing when the difference between the
-max. load – 0 N
Load Dec. maximum load exceeds this value*2. The
press also determines the maximum load at
this time as the top load value.
OK/Fault on No Operation when top load did not occur
OK/NG ―
Top during sampling
OK/Fault when Judgment result when pressing is ended
OK/NG ―
Out of Sen. Area without arriving at the judgment start pos.
None / End
Action on Sensor
program / End run ― Operation when judgment result was “fault”
Fault
on the spot
Relay Specified relay switches ON when judgment
number is OK
Sensor Fault Relay Specified relay switches ON when judgment
0000 – FFFF
(OUT) number is fault
If the judgment value exceeds the upper
0000 – FFFF limit load and is a fault, the specified relay
Upper (OUT) number
switches ON
If the judgment value is below the lower limit
0000 – FFFF load and is a fault, the specified relay
Lower (OUT) number
switches ON
Reg. Num of Top 000 – FFF Register no. Top load value is written to the specified
Load (OUT) 1 – 32 Data width register
Register
Reg. Num of Top 000 – FFF The ram position when the top load value is
number
Pos (OUT) reached is written to the specified register.
1 – 32 Data width
Top Load Sensor Relay The relay is ON when the top load is
0000 – FFFF
(OUT) number reached.
*1 When [Judg. Value of Load Up] is set to 0, the press determines the load is increasing when the
sampling load consecutively increases 10 times (i.e., operates the same as done with software
versions lower than 7.0.)

*2 When [Judg. Value of Load Dec.] is set to 0, the press determines the load is decreasing when the
sampling load consecutively decreases 10 times (i.e., operates the same as done with software
Top Load
C B
D
A
A: After sampling starts, if the load exceeds this value (Judg. Value of Load Up), the press determines
the load is increasing.
B: After the press determines the load is increasing, if the difference with the maximum load exceeds
the [Judg. Value of Load Dec.], the press determines the load is decreasing.
C: When this is set to 0, the press determines the load is increasing if the sampling load consecutively
increases 10 times.
D: When this is set to 0, the press determines the load is decreasing if the sampling load consecutively
decreases 10 times.

9. Top Load Sensor/Given dis.
The top load (load value of the section that was first shifted from increase to decrease within the range)
is sampled between the sampling start position and end position, and judgment is executed.
[Load] Judg. Value of Load Dec.
Upper limit load

Top
Top limit load
Lower limit load

Judg. Value of Load UP
Top load position

Sampling start position [Position]
Distance Origin
Setting
Range/Selections
Origin distance/judgment end distance.
-max. stroke length Position where sampling is started
Sampling Begin Dis. mm
– max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin)
-max. stroke length Position where sampling is ended
– max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin).
Lower Lim. Load of -max. load – max. Judgment lower limit fault if the
N
Top load judgment value falls below the lower
limit.
Top load
judgment value exceeds this value.
When the load from the start of
Judg. Value of Load sampling exceeds this value, the
0 – max. load N
UP press determines that the load is
increasing*1.
increasing, the press determines the
load is decreasing when the
Judg. Value of Load
-max. load – 0 N difference between the maximum
Dec.
load exceeds this value*2. The press
also determines the maximum load
at this time as the top load value.
Operation when top load did not
OK/Fault on No Top OK/NG ―
occur during sampling
Sen. Area

Setting
Range/Selections
None /
Action on Sensor Operation when judgment result was
End program / ―
Fault “fault”
End run on the spot
Upper (OUT) number
0000 – FFFF lower limit load and is a fault, the
Lower (OUT) number
Register
Reg.Num of Top 000-FFF Top load value is written to the
number
Load (OUT) specified register
1-32 Data width
000-FFF
Reg. Num of Top Dis number starting point) when the top load
(OUT) value occurs is written to the
1-32 Data width
specified register
Top Load Sensor Relay When the top load value occurs is
0000-FFFF
(OUT) number written to the register
Top Load
C B
D
A
A: After sampling starts, if the load exceeds this value (Judg. Value of Load Up), the press determines
the load is increasing.
B: After the press determines the load is increasing, if the difference with the maximum load exceeds
the [Judg. Value of Load Dec.] value, the press determines the load is decreasing.

C: When this is set to 0, the press determines the load is increasing if the sampling load consecutively
increases 10 times.
D: When this is set to 0, the press determines the load is decreasing if the sampling load consecutively
decreases 10 times.
10. Valley Load Sensor/Given Pos.

The valley load (load value of the section that was first shifted from decrease to increase within the
range) is sampled between the sampling start position and end position, and judgment is executed.
[Load]
Judg. Value of Load Dec. Judg. Value of Load UP
Upper limit load
Valley
Valley load value

Lower limit load
[Position]
Sampling Start Valley load Sampling End
Position position position

Setting
Range/Selections
0.000 – max. stroke Coordinates at which load sampling
length is started
0.000 – max. stroke Coordinates at which load sampling
length is ended
Lower Lim. Load of -max. load – max. range. Judgment lower limit fault if
N
Valley load the judgment value is below the
lower limit value
Upper Lim. Load of -max. load – max. Judgment upper limit fault if the
N
Valley load judgment value exceeds the upper
limit value
When the load from the start of
Judg. Value of Load sampling exceeds this value, the
-max. load – 0 N
Dec. press determines that the load is
decreasing*1.
After the press determines the load
is decreasing, the load is
determined as increasing when the
Judg. Value of Load difference between the minimum
0 – max. load N
UP load exceeds this value*2. The
press also determines the minimum
load at this time as the valley load
value.
Operation when valley load did not
OK/Fault on No Valley OK/NG ―
occur during sampling
Sen. Area
Action on Sensor None / End program / ― Operation when judgment result
Fault End run on the spot was “fault”
Relay If the judgment value exceeds the
0000 – FFFF number upper limit load and is a fault, the
(OUT)
Relay If the judgment value is below the
0000 – FFFF number lower limit load and is a fault, the
(OUT)
Register
Reg.Num of Valley 000 – FFF Valley load value is written to the
number
Load (OUT) specified register
1 – 32 Data width
Register Valley load value is written to the
Reg.Num of Valley 000 – FFF
number specified register when valley load
Pos (OUT)
1 – 32 Data width is reached
Relay If the valley load occurred, the
Valley Sensor (OUT) 0000 – FFFF
number specified relay switches ON

D
A
C B
Valley Load
A: After sampling starts, if the load exceeds this value (Judg. Value of Load Dec.), the press
determines the load is decreasing.
B: After the press determines the load is decreasing, if the load exceeds the [Judg. Value of Load Up],
the press determines the load is increasing.
C: When this is set to 0, the press determines the load is decreasing if the sampling load consecutively
decreases 10 times.
D: When this is set to 0, the press determines the load is increasing if the sampling load consecutively
increases 10 times.

11. Valley Load Sensor/Given dis.
The valley load (load value of the section that was first shifted from decrease to increase within the
range) is sampled between the sampling start position and end position, and judgment is executed.
Judg. Value of Load Dec. Judg. Value of Load UP
[Load]
Upper limit load Valley
Valley load value
Lower limit load
Sampling start position Valley load position [Position]

Distance Origin
Setting
Range/Selections
Origin distance/ end distance.
-max. stroke length – Position where sampling is started
max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin).
-max. stroke length – Position where sampling is ended
max. stroke length (Distance from distance origin).
Lower Lim. Load of Judgment lower limit fault if the
-max. load – max. load N
Valley judgment value is below the lower limit
value.
Upper Lim. Load of Judgment upper limit fault if the
-max load – max. load N
Valley judgment value exceeds the upper
limit value.
When the load from the start of sampling
Judg. Value of Load
-max. load – 0 N exceeds this value, the press
Dec.
determines that the load is decreasing*1.
decreasing, the load is determined as
increasing when the difference
Judg. Value of Load
0 – max. load N between the minimum load exceeds
UP
this value*2. The press also
determines the minimum load at this
time as the valley load value.
OK/Fault on No Operation when valley load did not
OK/NG ―
Valley occur during sampling.
Sen. Area
start position.

Setting
Range/Selections
―
Fault End run on the spot “fault”.
number judgment is OK.
Relay Operation when judgment result was
number “fault”.
Upper (OUT) number
specified relay switches ON.
0000 – FFFF lower limit load and is a fault, the
Lower (OUT) number
Register
000 – FFF
Reg. Num of Valley number Valley load value is written to the
Load (OUT) Data specified register
1 – 32
width
000 – FFF
Reg. Num of Valley number starting point) when the valley load
Dis (OUT) Data value is reached is written to the
1 – 32
width specified register
Relay If the valley load occurred, the
Valley Sensor (OUT) 0000 – FFFF
number specified relay switches ON
D
A
C B
Valley Load
A: After sampling starts, if the load exceeds this value (Judg. Value of Load Dec.), the press
determines the load is decreasing.
B: After the press determines the load is decreasing, if the load exceeds the [Judg. Value of Load Up],
the press determines the load is increasing.

C: When this is set to 0, the press determines the load is decreasing if the sampling load consecutively
decreases 10 times.
D: When this is set to 0, the press determines the load is increasing if the sampling load consecutively
increases 10 times.
12. P-P Sensor/Given Pos.

The peak to peak load (value of the maximum load value minus the minimum load value within the
range) is sampled between the sampling start position to the end position, and the judgment is
executed.
[Load] [Peak to peak
load value]
Upper limit load*
Peak to peak
load value
Lower limit load*
Sampling start position Sampling end position [Position] [Sampling end position]
*These are settings to see whether or not the size of the peak to peak load values (above) exceed the
upper limit load/fall below the lower limit load (above to the right).

0.000 – max. stroke Coordinates at which load
length sampling is started
0.000 – max. stroke Coordinates at which load
length sampling is ended
Lower Lim. Load of range. Judgment lower limit fault if
Peak the judgment value is below the
lower limit value
Upper limit value of judgment
Upper Lim. Load of value range. Judgment upper limit
Peak fault if the judgment value
exceeds the upper limit value
OK/Fault when Out
of Sen. Area
Action on Sensor None / End program / Operation when judgment result
―
Fault End run on the spot was “fault”
Upper (OUT) number
Sensor Fault of Relay lower limit
0000 – FFFF
Lower (OUT) number load and is a fault, the specified
relay switches ON
Register
Reg. Num of Peak 000 – FFF Peak to peak load value is written
number
Load (OUT) to the specified register
1 – 32 Data width
13. P-P Sensor/Given dis.

The peak to peak load (value of the maximum load value minus the minimum load value within the
range) is sampled between the sampling start position to the end position, and the judgment is
executed. For details on the calculation method for the judgment start position and end position, refer
to “3.5.2. Specifying the Judgment Area.”
[Peak to peak
load value]
[Load]
Upper limit load*
Peak to
peak load
value
Lower limit load*
Sampling start position [Sampling end

[Position]
Sampling end distance distance]
Distance Origin

*These are settings to see whether or not the size of the peak to peak load values (above) exceed the
upper limit load/fall below the lower limit load (above to the right).

Step start position ―
mm
Sampling End -max. stroke length – Position where sampling is ended
mm
Lower Lim. Load
-max. load – max. load N Judgment lower limit fault if the
of Peak
Upper Lim. Load
-max. load – max. load N Judgment upper limit fault if the
of Peak
judgment value exceeds the upper limit
Judgment result when operation was
OK/Fault when
OK/NG ― completed without the ram reaching
Out of Sen. Area
the sampling start position
―
Sensor OK Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay no.
(OUT) judgment is OK
Sensor Fault Specified relay switches ON when
0000 – FFFF Relay no.
(OUT) judgment is fault
Sensor Fault of
0000 – FFFF Relay no. upper limit load and is a fault, the
Upper (OUT)
Sensor Fault of
0000 – FFFF Relay no. limit load and is a fault, the specified
Lower (OUT)
relay switches ON
Reg.Num of Register
000 – FFF Peak to peak load value is written to
Peak Load no.
the specified register
(OUT) 1 – 32 Data width

14. DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
DIF1 Sensor is done between the Sensor Begin Pos. and the Sensor End Pos. during executing the
step. [Load]
Upper limit load of DIF1
Load increased (N)/time (s)

Load of DIF1
Lower limit load of DIF1
Tim
DIF1 position
Position
Sampling start position Sampling end position
Setting
Range/Selections
0.000 – max. Position at which load sampling is
stroke length started
0.000 – max. Position at which load sampling is
stroke length ended
Lower Lim. Load of -max. load – max. Judgment lower limit fault if the DIF
N
DIF stroke length 1 judgment value is below the lower
limit value
Upper Lim. Load of -max. load – max. Judgment upper limit fault if the DIF
N
DIF stroke length 1 judgment value exceeds the upper
limit value
Ram Lower Limit Sensor: if the load
increment amount (N/s) per unit of
time exceeds this value, this is
deemed that DIF 1 occurred (enter
positive numbers into the slant
value).
Slant Value -999999 – 999999 N/s
Ram Upper Limit Sensor: if the load
time falls below this value, this is
negative numbers into the slant
value).
OK/Fault on No DIF OK/NG ― DIF1 did not occur during sampling
Sen. Area
None / End
program / End run ―
on the spot

Setting
Range/Selections
judgment is OK
judgment is fault
(OUT)
(OUT)
Register Load value when judgment is
Reg. Num of DIF Load 000 – FFF
number executed is written to the specified
(OUT)
1 – 32 Data width register
Register
Reg. Num of DIF Pos 000 – FFF Ram position when DIF 1 occurs is
number
(OUT) written to the specified register
1 – 32 Data width
When DIF 1 occurs, the relay
DIF Sensor (OUT) 0000 – FFFF Relay number
switches ON.
15. DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.

DIF1 Sensor is done between the Sensor Begin Dis. and the Sensor End Dis. during executing the
section. The distance origin is the step start position.
[Load]
Upper Lim. Load of DIF1
Load increased (N)/time (s)

Load of DIF1
Lower Lim. Load of DIF1
[Time]
DIF1 position
[Position]
Sampling start position Sampling end position

Setting
Range/Selections
Reference position for judgment
Type of Distance
Step Start Position ― start distance/judgment end
Origin
distance
-max stroke length – Position at which load sampling is
max. stroke length started (from the distance origin)
-max. stroke length – Position at which load sampling is
max. stroke length ended (from the distance origin)
Lower Lim. Load of -max. load – max. Judgment lower limit fault if the DIF
N
DIF load 1 judgment value is below the lower
limit value.
Upper Lim. Load of -max. load – max. Judgment upper limit fault if the DIF
N
DIF load 1 judgment value exceeds this
value
time exceeds this value, this is
positive numbers into the slant
value).
Slant Value -999999 - 999999 N/s
Ram Upper Limit Sensor: if the load
time falls below this value, this is
value).
OK/Fault on No DIF OK/NG ― DIF1 did not occur during sampling
Sen. Area
None / End program / Operation when judgment result
End run on the spot was “fault”
Sensor OK (OUT) 0000-FFFF
Sensor Fault (OUT) 0000-FFFF
Sensor Fault of Upper Relay
0000-FFFF upper limit load and is a fault, the
(OUT) number
Sensor Fault of Lower Relay
0000-FFFF lower limit load and is a fault, the
(OUT) number
Register Load value when sensor is
Reg. Num of DIF Load 000-FFF
number executed is written to the specified
(OUT)
1-32 Data width register
Register
Reg. Num of DIF Pos 000-FFF Ram position when DIF 1 occurs is
number
(OUT) written to the specified register
1-32 Data width
Relay When DIF 1 occurs, the relay
DIF Sensor (OUT) 0000-FFFF
number switches ON.

16. DIF 2 Sensor/Given Pos.
DIF2 Sensor is done between the Sensor Begin Pos. and the Sensor End Pos. during executing the
step.
[Load]
Upper Lim. Load of DIF2
Load increased (N)/distance(mm)
Load of DIF2
Lower Lim. Load of DIF2
Position of DIF2
[Position]
Sampling Start Position Sampling End Position

Position at which load sampling
Sampling Begin Pos. 0.000 – max. stroke length mm
is started
Position at which load sampling
Sampling End Pos. 0.000 – max. stroke length mm
is ended
Lower Lim. Load of range. Judgment lower limit fault
DIF if the DIF2 judgment value is
below the lower limit value
Upper limit of judgment value
Upper Lim. Load of range. Judgment upper limit fault
DIF if the DIF2 judgment value
exceeds this value
Ram Lower Limit Sensor: if the
load increment amount (N/mm)
per unit of distance exceeds this
value, this is deemed that DIF 2
occurred (enter positive numbers
into the slant value).
Slant Value -999999 – 999999 N/mm
Ram Upper Limit Sensor: if the
load increment amount (N/mm)
per unit of distance falls below
this value, this is deemed that
DIF 2 occurred (enter negative
numbers into the slant value).
DIF did not occur during
OK/Fault on No DIF OK/NG ―
sampling
Sen. Area
Action on Sensor None / End program / End Operation when judgment result
―
Fault run on the spot was “fault”
Relay Specified relay switches ON
number when judgment is OK

Relay Specified relay switches ON
number when judgment is fault
0000 – FFFF the upper limit load and is a fault,
Upper (OUT) number
If the judgment value is below
0000 – FFFF the lower limit load and is a fault,
Lower (OUT) number
Register Load value when sensor is
Reg. Num of DIF 000 – FFF
number executed is written to the
Load (OUT)
Register Ram position when DIF2 occurs
Reg. Num of DIF Pos 000 – FFF
number is written to the specified
(OUT)
1 – 32 Data width register.
Relay When DIF2 occurs, the relay
DIF Sensor (OUT) 0000 – FFFF
number switches ON.

DIF2 Sensor is done between the Sensor Begin Dis. and the Sensor End Dis. during executing the
section. The distance origin is the section start position.
[Load]
Upper Lim. Load of
DIF2
Load increased (N)/distance(mm)

Load of DIF2
Lower Lim. Load of

DIF2
Position of DIF2
[Position]
Sampling Start Position Sampling End Position

Sampling Begin -max. stroke length – Position at which load sampling is
mm
Dis. max. stroke length started (from the distance origin)
-max. stroke length – Position at which load sampling is
max. stroke length ended (from the distance origin)
range.
Lower Lim. Load of
-max. load – max. load N Judgment lower limit fault if the DIF2
DIF
value
Upper Lim. Load of
-max. load – max. load N Judgment upper limit fault if the DIF2
DIF

increment amount (N/mm) per unit of
distance exceeds this value, this is
positive numbers into the slant value).
Slant Value -999999 - 999999 N/mm Ram Upper Limit Sensor: if the load
increment amount (N/mm) per unit of
distance falls below this value, this is
value).
Operation when judgment result was
OK/Fault on No DIF OK/NG ―
“fault”
OK/Fault when Out
of Sen. Area
start position
―
Sensor OK (OUT) 0000-FFFF
Sensor Fault (OUT) 0000-FFFF
0000-FFFF upper limit load and is a fault, the
Upper (OUT) number
0000-FFFF lower limit load and is a fault, the
Lower(OUT) number
Register
000-FFF
Reg. Num of DIF number Load value when sensor is executed
Load (OUT) Data is written to the specified register
1-32
width
Register
000-FFF
Reg. Num of DIF number Ram position when DIF2 occurs is
Pos (OUT) Data written to the specified register
1-32
width
Relay When DIF2 occurs, the relay switches
DIF Sensor (OUT) 0000-FFFF
number ON.

18. Position Sensor (End)
Position sensor is made at the end of the step. The ram position is judged at the end of pressing drive.
Step End Position [Time]
Lower limit fault

Lower limit position
OK
Upper limit position Judgment value
[Position] Upper limit fault
Setting
Range/Selections
0.000 – max. Lower limit value of judgment value
Lower Limit Pos. mm
stroke length range
0.000 – max. Upper limit value of judgment value
Upper Limit Pos. mm
stroke length range
None / End
was fault
run on the spot
judgment is OK
judgment is fault
(OUT)
(OUT)
000 – FFF Register number Load value when judgment is
The Load (OUT) executed is written to the specified
1 – 32 Data width
register
000 – FFF Register number The ram position when the
The Position (OUT) judgment is made is written to the
1 – 32 Data width
specified register

19. Load Sensor/Given dis. (End)
Judges the load at the end of the step, after sampling the load data between the starting and ending
distances. Set the upper and lower limits at the starting and ending distances. The upper and lower
limits at the intermediate point varies as shown in the figure below.
[Load] : Judgment Range

End position upper
limit load Upper limit fault
OK
End position lower

limit load
Lower limit fault
Starting position upper
limit load
Starting position lower
limit load
Start position distance [Position]
End position distance

Distance origin
(Step End Position)
Setting
Range/Selections
Distance Origin Reference position for the start
Step End Position ―
Selection and end position distances
Start position distance from the
-max. stroke length distance origin (-2.000mm:
Sensor Begin Dis. mm
– max. stroke length Starts 2mm before the distance
origin)
Lower Lim. Load at Lower limit value for the start
0.0 – max. load N
Begin Dis. position
Upper Lim. Load at Upper limit value for the start
0.0– max. load N
Begin Dis. position
End position distance from the
-max. stroke length distance origin (-1.000mm:
Sensor End Dis. mm
– max. stroke length Ends 1mm before the distance
origin)
Lower Lim. Load at Upper limit value for the end
0.0 – max. load N
End Dis. position
Upper Lim. Load at Lower limit value for the end
0.0– max. load N
End Dis. position
OK/Fault when Out
of Sen. Area
None / End program
/ End run on the ―
spot

Setting
Range/Selections
when judgment is OK
when judgment is Fault
Sensor Fault of the upper limit load and is a
0000 – FFFF Relay Number
Upper (OUT) fault, the specified relay
switches ON
If the judgment value below the
Sensor Fault of
0000 – FFFF Relay Number lower limit load and is a fault,
Lower (OUT)
000 – FFF Register Number Judgment value is written to the
The Load (OUT)
000 – FFF Register Number
Ram position when the
The Distance (OUT) judgment was executed is
1 – 32 Data width
written to the specified register
Maximum sampling period: 60 sec. (60mm if pressing speed is 1mm/)
Buffer size for the sampling data: 96K Byte
 Judgment Timing
Judgment is done after a step is finished (after the step holding time). The press does not proceed to
the next step before finishing judgment; the longer the sampling period, the longer the idling time.
Pressing start position

Return drive
Step drive
Step end position
Judgment
Step holding time (Judgment time varies depending on
In step movement
the sampling data size.)

20. Load Sensor (End of the Step)
Judges the load at the end of the step.
Setting
Range/Selections
-max load – Upper limit value of the judgment
Upper Limit Load N
max. load load
-max load – Lower limit value of the judgment
Lower Limit Load N
max. load load
None / End
Action on Sensor Fault program / End -
was fault
run on the spot
judgment is OK
judgment is fault
(OUT)
(OUT)
000 – FFF Register number Load value when executed
The Load (OUT) judgment value is written to the
1 – 32 Data width
specified register
000 – FFF Register number The ram position when the
The Position (OUT) judgment is made is written to the
1 – 32 Data width
specified register
 Judgment Timing
Normal Pressing Urgent Stop
Work Contact
Return Step Movement
Step Movement
Step End
Urgent Stop
Step Movement Step Holding Step Movement Input
Step Execution Step End Step Execution Step End

(Program End)
Judgment Execution
Step Judgment (Step End) Step Judgment (Step End)

Execution Execution

21. Load Path Sensor/Given Position
Judges the path of the load curve that passes through the sampling area containing the position and
load at start/end of the judgment. If the load curve passes through the sampling area, pressing for that
step is judged as OK. The load and position where the load curve enters (ENTER*) the sampling area
and/or exits (EXIT*) the sampling area can be output using specialized registers.
The path can be selected from among an A, B, or C path (path type).
Setting
Range/Selections
0.000 – max. stroke Coordinates for where the
Sensor Start Position mm
length judgment starts.
Lower Lim. Load at -max. load – Lower limit of the sensor range
N
Begin Pos. max. load at the sensor start position.
Upper Lim. Load at -max. load – Upper limit of the sensor range
N
Begin Pos. max. load at the sensor start position.
0.000 – max. stroke Coordinates for where the
Sensor End Position mm
length judgment ends.
N
End Pos. max. load at the sensor end position.
N
End Pos. max. load at the sensor end position.
The type of load curve that
A Path / B Path /
Path Type - passes through the sensor
C Path
area.
OK/Fault when Out
OK/NG - is ended without arriving at the
of Sen. Area
judgment start position.
None / End program
/ End run on the -
Fault was “fault”.
spot
when judgment is OK.
when judgment is Fault.
000 – FFF Register Number The load value where the load
Output of the Load curve enters the sampling area
(ENTER) - OUT 1 – 32 Data Width is written to the specified
register.
000 – FFF Register Number The position where the load
Output of the
curve enters the sampling area
Position (ENTER) -
1 – 32 Data Width is written to the specified
OUT
register.
Output of the Load
curve exits the sampling area is
(EXIT) - OUT 1 – 32 Data Width
written to the specified register.
Output of the 000 – FFF Register Number The position where the load
Position (EXIT) - 1 – 32 Data Width curve exits the sampling area is
OUT written to the specified register.
* “ENTER” is displayed as “ENT” and “EXIT” is displayed as “EXT” on the teaching pendant.

 A Path
The step is judged as OK if the load curve enters the sampling area from the lower limit side and exits from
the upper limit side. The step is judged as “fault” (no good) (as shown in Example: Fault Judgment 2 below)
in situations such as these: the load curve enters/exits from any other area, the sampling ended early, or
the load curve reentered the sampling area after exiting it. The step may also be judged as “fault” if the load
slightly oscillates causing it to reenter the sampling area. If this happens, adjust the pressing speed.
When the load curve was judged to have entered and exited within the load range, the load and
position (ENT/EXT*) are output. However, if the load curve was judged to not have entered or exited
within the load range or it reentered the load range after exiting, the load and position are output as
zero. In addition to this, the load and position are not checked when the step is judged as “fault” (no
good) and so the load and position may not be output in some cases.
NOTE: “ENT” is the abbreviation for “ENTER,” and “EXT” is the abbreviation for “EXIT.”
• Example: OK Judgment
Load : Sampling Area
Judgment Load/Pos (EXT)
Judgment End
Judgment Load/Pos (ENT)

Position
Judgment Start Pos Judgment End Pos
• Example: Fault Judgment 1 Example: Fault Judgment 2
Load Load
(Judgment Load/Pos (EXT) is 0) (Judgment Load/Pos (ENT and EXT) are 0)
Judgment Load/Pos
(ENT)
Judgment (Judgment Load/Pos
Load/Pos (EXT) is 0)
(EXT)
Judgment Load/Pos Judgment

(ENT) Load/Pos (ENT)
Pos. Pos.
Judgment Start Pos Judgment End Pos Judgment Start Pos Judgment End Pos

 B Path
The step is judged as OK if the load curve enters the sampling area from the left side and exits from the
upper limit side. The step is judged as “fault” (no good) (as shown in Example: Fault Judgment 2 below) in
situations such as these: the load curve enters/exits from any other area, the sampling ended early, or
the load curve reentered the sampling area after exiting it. The step may also be judged as “fault” if the
load slightly oscillates causing it to reenter the sampling area. If this happens, adjust the pressing speed.
When the load curve was judged to have entered and exited within the load range, the load and position
(ENT/EXT*) are output. However, if the load curve was judged to not have entered or exited within the
load range or it reentered the load range after exiting, the load and position are output as zero. In addition
to this, the load and position are not checked when the step is judged as “fault” (no good) and so the load
and position may not be output in some cases. NOTE: “ENT” is the abbreviation for “ENTER,” and “EXT”
is the abbreviation for “EXIT.”
Judgment Load/Pos
(EXT) Judgment End
Position
Load Load
(Judgment Load/Pos (ENT and EXT) are 0)
Judgment Load/Pos (Judgment Load /

(ENT) (Judgment Pos (EXT) is 0)
Load/Pos (EXT)
is 0)
Judgment Load/Pos
Judgment Load/Pos (ENT) (ENT)
Pos Pos

 C Path
The step is judged as OK if the load curve enters the sampling area from the left side and exits from
the right side. The step is judged as “fault” (no good) in situations such as these: the load curve
enters/exits from any other area, or the sampling ended early. When the load curve was judged to
have entered and exited within the load range, the load and position (ENT/EXT*) are output. However,
if the load curve was judged to not have entered or exited within the load range, the load and position
are output as zero. In addition to this, the load and position are not checked when the step is judged as
“fault” (no good) and so the load and position may not be output in some cases.
: Sampling Area
Load
Judgment End
Position
Load Load
Judgment Load/Pos (ENT) (Judgment Load /

Pos (EXT) is 0)
(Judgment Load /
Pos (EXT) is 0)
Judgment Load/Pos
(ENT)
Pos Pos

22. Load Path Sensor/Given Distance
Judges the path of the load curve that passes through the sampling area containing the position and
load at start/end of the judgment. If a load value and position exist where the load curve enters
(ENTER*) and exits (EXIT*) the sampling area, the step is judged as OK (if the load curve exits the
sampling area). The path can be selected from among an A, B, or C path (path type).
Setting
Range/Selections
Sensor Start 0.000 – max. stroke Position where the judgment
mm
Distance length starts.
N
Begin Dis. max. load at the sensor start position.
N
Begin Dis. max. load at the sensor start position.
0.000 – max. stroke Position where the judgment
Sensor End Distance mm
length ends.
N
End Dis. max. load at the sensor end distance.
Upper Lim .Load at -max. load – Upper limit of the sensor range
N
End Dis. max. load at the sensor end distance.
OK/Fault when Out
OK/NG - is ended without arriving at the
of Sen. Area
judgment start position.
The type of load curve that
A Path / B Path /
Path Type - passes through the sensor
C Path
area.
None / End program
/ End run on the -
Fault was “fault”.
spot
when judgment is OK.
when judgment is Fault.
Output of the Load curve enters the sampling area
(ENT) - OUT* 1 – 32 Data Width is written to the specified
register.
000 – FFF Register Number The position where the load
Output of the
curve enters the sampling area
Position (ENT) -
1 – 32 Data Width is written to the specified
OUT*
register.
Output of the Load
curve exits the sampling area is
(EXT) - OUT* 1 – 32 Data Width
written to the specified register.
Output of the 000 – FFF Register Number The position where the load
Position (EXT) – 1 – 32 Data Width curve exits the sampling area is
OUT* written to the specified register.
* “ENTER” is displayed as “ENT” and “EXIT” is displayed as “EXT” on the teaching pendant.

 A Path
The step is judged as OK if the load curve enters the sampling area from the lower limit side and exits
from the upper limit side. The step is judged as “fault” (no good) (as shown in Example: Fault Judgment
2 below) in situations such as these: the load curve enters/exits from any other area, the sampling
ended early, or the load curve reentered the sampling area after exiting it. The step may also be judged
as “fault” if the load slightly oscillates causing it to reenter the sampling area. If this happens, adjust the
pressing speed. When the load curve was judged to have entered and exited within the load range, the
load and distance (ENT/EXT*) are output. However, if the load curve was judged to not have entered
or exited within the load range or it reentered the load range after exiting, the load and distance are
output as zero. In addition to this, the load and distance are not checked when the step is judged as
“fault” (no good) and so the load and distance may not be output in some cases.
Judgment Load/Dis (EXT)
Judgment End
Judgment Load/Dis (ENT)

Position
Judgment Start Dis Judgment End Dis
Load Load
(Judgment Load/Dis (EXT) is 0) (Judgment Load/Dis (ENT and EXT) are 0)
Judgment Load/Dis
(ENT)
Judgment (Judgment Load/Dis
Load/Dis (EXT) is 0)
(EXT)
Judgment Load/Pos Judgment

(ENT) Load/Dis (ENT)
Pos. Pos.
Judgment Start Dis Judgment End Dis Judgment Start Dis Judgment End Dis

 B Path
the upper limit side. The step is judged as “fault” (no good) (as shown in Example: Fault Judgment 2
below) in situations such as these: the load curve enters/exits from any other area, the sampling ended
early, or the load curve reentered the sampling area after exiting it. The step may also be judged as
“fault” if the load slightly oscillates causing it to reenter the sampling area. If this happens, adjust the
pressing speed. When the load curve was judged to have entered and exited within the load range, the
load and distance (ENT/EXT*) are output. However, if the load curve was judged to not have entered
or exited within the load range or it reentered the load range after exiting, the load and distance are
output as zero. In addition to this, the load and distance are not checked when the step is judged as
“fault” (no good) and so the load and distance may not be output in some cases.
Judgment Load/Dis
(EXT) Judgment End
Position
Load Load
(Judgment Load/Dis (ENT and EXT) are 0)
Judgment Load/Pos (Judgment Load /

(ENT) (Judgment Dis (EXT) is 0)
Load/Dis (EXT)
is 0)
Judgment Load/Dis
Judgment Load/Dis (ENT) (ENT)
Pos Pos

 C Path
the right side. The step is judged as “fault” (no good) in situations such as these: the load curve
enters/exits from any other area, or the sampling ended early. When the load curve was judged to
have entered and exited within the load range, the load and distance (ENT/EXT*) are output. However,
if the load curve was judged to not have entered or exited within the load range, the load and distance
are output as zero. In addition to this, the load and distance are not checked when the step is judged
as “fault” (no good) and so the load and distance may not be output in some cases.
: Sampling Area
Load
Judgment End
Position
Load Load
Judgment Load/Dis (ENT) (Judgment Load /

Dis (EXT) is 0)
(Judgment Load /
Dis (EXT) is 0)
Judgment Load/Dis
(ENT)
Pos Pos

3.5.5 Differential Sensors
 Processing Average Movements
An average movement value is appointed to take position and load discrepancies into consideration.
The settable parameters are described below.
• Differential Sampling Interval

Select the sampling quantity for calculating “load” and “position” average movement values in 1ms
cycles. (Select from 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128ms)
DIF (inclination), average movement position, and the average movement load are calculated in 1ms
cycles.
Also, the importance of the average movement is made according to the “Differential Sampling
Interval.”
128 step buffer (128ms sample)
Load
Average movement load is calculated in 1ms

cycles.
The quantity of data used in the average value
LOADAVG_0 calculation differs according to the sampling time
settings (2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128ms). The example
LOADAVG_1 above is a 4ms sample.
128 step buffer (128ms sample)
Position
The position is updated in 2ms cycles therefore the

same position data is lined up two at a time.
Average movement position is calculated in 1ms
cycles.
The quantity of data used in the average value
POSAVG_0 calculation differs according to the sampling time
settings (2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128ms). The example
POSAVG_1 above is a 4ms sample.

The differential (incline) is calculated according to the following:
• Differential (DIF1)
DIF1=LOADAVG_1-LOADAVG_0 [N/s]
• Differential (DIF2)
DIF2=(LOADAVG_1-LOADAVG_0) / (POSAVG_1-POSAVG_0) [N/mm]
The differential sampling interval needs to be adjusted to the appropriate value according to the press
conditions such as the workpiece and press speed etc.
If the differential sampling interval is too short, the “position” and “load” data will be exposed to noise
and statistical fluctuations causing discrepancies to appear. If this happens, the DIF will look as if it is
occurring before the “actual DIF position.”
On the other hand, if the differential sampling interval is too long, the “position” and “load” data
discrepancies are contained, however, the “response delay” will be too large causing the DIF to look as
if it is occurring after the “actual DIF position.”
Load
Short DIF sampling interval
Optimum DIF sampling interval
DIF1 = Load Increase (N) / Distance (mm)

Long DIF sampling interval
Position
Actual DIF position
If you look at a DIF sampling interval

which is too short, this position
If you look at a DIF sampling interval
appears as the DIF position.
which is too long, this position
appears as the DIF position

 DIF Judgment (5ms cycle)
Load
DIF Upper
Load Limit
DIF1 = Load Increase (N) / Distance (mm)
DIF Load
DIF Lower
Load Limit
DIF Pos.
Position
Sampling Start Sampling End
Position Position
5ms
DIF N DIF N DIF Y DIF N DIF Y DIF Y DIF Y DIF Y DIF Y DIF Y
Differential Position Pos.

Instant values
Differential Load Load
Time
With the diagram above, when the following conditions are met, the cycle is judged as having a
differential (DIF Y):
DIF 1 > inclination sensor value

Both differential sensors 1 and 2 use the same formula.

 How Inclination Sensor Values are Decided
1. Take a test shot and estimate the inclination values from the graph shown in JP-S Sampler.
Load [N]
11666(N/mm)
1000(N/mm)
Pos. [mm]
In the diagram above, the inclination before the DIF occurs is estimated at 1000 (N/mm) and the
inclination after the DIF occurs is estimated at 11666 (N/mm).
2. The validity of the inclination value is verified through the numerical data of the position that the DIF
occurs at in the CSV file. If you set the time series data to “average movement value” and also set
“Time Series Data Interval” to “Differential Sampling Interval” with the closest value, the trend is
even easier to read.
Example: Differential Sensor Sampling Interval is 16ms:

Set the time series data sampling interval to 20ms.
Example: Differential Sensor Sampling Interval is 32ms:

Set the time series data sampling interval to 50ms.

Below is an excerpt of a CSV file.
This shot consisted of the following: Stop on the Event (DIF stop, 1mm/s)  Stop at the Setting
Increasing Load (5mm/s), and the DIF occurrence position was 41.768mm. Also, the differential sensor
sampling interval is 16ms and the time series data sampling interval is 20ms.
Inclination
Position (mm) Load (N)
(N/mm)
41.694 2425
41.719 2461 1440
41.74 2481 952
2842
41.759 2535
10428 DIF Occurrence Point
41.78 2754
12333
41.798 2976
13581
41.853 3723 12853
41.928 4687
Because the inclination at the time of DIF occurrence is 10428 (N/mm), the inclination judgment value
is set to 8000 (N/mm) to take discrepancies into consideration.
3.6 Step I/O

The status of executing the step or the value of result can be output to a relay or register. Output data
can be referred to though an external device for detailed control.
Setting items are shown below and the items can be set in each step.
Name I/O Type Function

Step execution (OUT) Output Relay ON: Step executing
Step driving (OUT) Output Relay ON: Step driving
Step Holding (OUT) Output Relay ON: Step holding time
Start Pos. of The Output Numerical Step start position is output
Step (OUT) Step executing OFF  ON: Data confirmed
End Pos. of the Step Output Numerical Step end position is output
(OUT) Step executing OFF  ON: Data cleared,
ON  OFF: Data confirmed
Start Load of the Step Output Numerical Step start load is output
(OUT) Step executing OFF  ON: Data confirmed
End Load of the Step Output Numerical Step end load is output
(OUT) Step executing OFF  ON: Data cleared,
ON  OFF: Data confirmed
Abort the Step Input Relay OFF  ON: Decrease speed and holding time
Driving (IN)
Abort the Step (IN) Input Relay OFF  ON: End step

3.6.1 Step I/O Timing Chart (Normal)
Approach drive

Probe drive
Work touch position
Return drive
Step drive
Pressing end position
Step executing output
Step driving output
Step holding time output
Step start position
Step start load
Step end position
Step end load

3.6.2 Step I/O Timing Chart (Step Drive End Input)
If the step drive end command is turned OFF  ON, driving will be ended for holding time (in case the
holding time is 0, step executing will be ended).

Approach drive

Probe drive
Work touch position
Return drive
Step drive
Step drive end command
Step end command
Step driving output
Step start position
Step start load
Step end position
Step end load

3.6.3 Step I/O Timing Chart (Step End Input)
If the step end command is turned OFF  ON, the step executing will be ended and the next step will
be started. In case the last step is being executed, the return will be started (refer to the diagram).

Approach drive

Probe drive
Work touch position

Return drive
Step drive
Step end command
Step driving output
Step start position
Step start load
Step end position
Step end load

3.7 Assigning a Workpiece Serial Number
You can assign an individual serial number to the result data for each workpiece. By assigning
workpiece serial numbers you can improve product traceability.
The workpiece serial numbers are displayed in JP-S Sampler and written in the sampling file (text
format). Up to 32 characters (ASCII) can be entered from an external control device.
Unique numbers can be assigned to all the workpieces by registering different numbers to each
operation.
Work serial number

3.7.1 Action
Assign a work serial number before the external control device enters a program run command, to
display the workpiece serial number in JP-S Sampler. Assign a new number each time a new
workpiece is processed, so that each workpiece is assigned with a unique number.
JP-S Electro Press

External Control Device
I/O Memory
Work Serial Number（ABCDEFG01）
Program Run Command
JP-S Sampler
Result Data with Work Serial Number

(ABCDEFG01)
ABCDEFG01 ABCDEFG02
Work Serial Number
Program Run Command
Program Run
Result Data with Work Serial Result Data with Work Serial
Number (ABCDEFG01) Number (BCDEFG02)

3.7.2 Assigning the Work Serial Number
There are two methods to enter a work serial number into the press:
(1) Using the Memory Register

Use JP-S Designer to assign to the press the register to which the workpiece serial number is entered.
A maximum of 16 registers (using 32 ASCII half-width characters) can be assigned.

For instance, to enter “ABCDEF0123456789” as a work serial number, set the following characters to
the registers. Assign the first two characters of the work serial number to the register 100H, then assign
the rest of the number to registers 101H – 107H.
Register 100H ＡＢ
Register 101H ＣＤ
Register 102H ＥＦ
Register 103H
０１
Register 104H
２３
Register 105H
４５
Register 106H
６７
Register 107H
８９
If the work serial number is shorter than 32 characters, fill the blanks with 00H (Hexadecimal). To enter
“ABCDEF01”, set the following character strings to the register. Assign the first two characters of the
work serial number to the register 100H, then assign the rest of the number to 101H – 107H.
Register 100H ＡＢ
Register 101H ＣＤ
Register 102H ＥＦ
Register 103H
０１
Register 104H
00H 00H
Register 105H
00H 00H
Register 106H
00H 00H
Register 107H
00H 00H
(2) Using Ethernet

The work serial number can be directly entered to the press by using Ethernet I/O function (Port No.
10029). Refer to “7.5.9. Work Serial Number Write (FC: 0500H)” for details of communication protocol.

4. EXTERNAL CONTROL
4.1 Control by Relay/Register (I/O Memory)

The Electro Press (JP-S) is operated by control signals from an external source.
Physically, there are four kinds below.
• Digital Input/Output (DIO)
• Fieldbus
• Ethernet
• RS-232C
And control signals are passed through one of these to the press.
There are domains which are connected to the DIO, Fieldbus, Ethernet or RS-232C (external
connection domains) and internal domains that can be used for program setting data.
The combination of these two domains is called the “I/O Memory”. The address is specified for the I/O
memory by the relay number or relay number.
The relay is 1-bit memory. The location (address) of the relay is specified by the hexadecimal number
of the relay.
Registers are composed of 1 word (16-bit). As the register number is the relay number expressed in
base 16 excluding the lowest digit (O-F), the register indicates the same location (address) as the relay.
For example, if the relay number is 1810 (base 16), the register number would be 181 (base 16).
The press can be controlled externally by the user assigning the “Special Relay/Special
Register” or “Setting Data” (step end position or judgment load etc.) functions to the I/O memory.
The I/O memory addresses (number) are as shown on the next page.

Relay Register
Name Point Function
number Number
1. Digital 000 - 001 Domain that corresponds to the input terminal
Input 0000 –
Input / of the digital input/output (DIO).
17 points 0010
Output DIN1-DIN17
(DIO) 070 - 070 Domain that corresponds to the output
Output 0700 –
terminal of the digital input/output (DIO).
16 points 070F
DOUT1~DOUT166
2. Fieldbus Input 100 - 17F
1000 – Domain that corresponds to the Fieldbus input
2048
17FF (external PLC writes, and press reads).
points
Output 180 - 1FF
1800 – Domain that corresponds to the fieldbus output
2048
1FFF (press writes, and external PLC reads).
points
3. Ethernet Input
2000 – 200 – Domain that corresponds to the Ethernet input
2048
27FF 27F (external device writes, and press reads).
points
Output Domain that corresponds to the Ethernet
2800 – 280 –
2048 output (press writes, and external device
2FFF 2FF
points reads).
4. RS-232C Input
3000 – 300 – Domain that corresponds to the RS-232C
2048
37FF 37F input (external device writes, and press reads).
points
Output Domain that corresponds to the RS-232C
3800 – 380 –
2048 output (press writes, and external device
3FFF 3FF
points reads).
5. Internal Set data can be used in this domain.
Input/output with external device cannot be
Domain used.
(Internal relay For example, the distance origin in the
16384 C000 – C00 –
internal register) points distance drive can be used. When the event is
FFFF FFF
stopped etc., it is possible to specify the
distance drive as the start point for the top load
occurrence position by writing the top load
judgment position.
The press can be controlled from an external device such as a PLC by assigning the “Special
Relay/Register” functions to the specified I/O memory.
To assign the special relay/register, use JP-S Designer.
One individual function needs to be assigned to each I/O memory. Even though it is possible to assign
the same functions to multiple I/O memory locations in the press system, we do not guarantee that this
will work. To check if functions are assigned to multiple locations, select [I/O cross reference] from the
[View] tab in JP-S Designer.

I/O memory Special Relay/Register
DIO Common functions

0000 Home position return
0001 Execute program
DIO Home position
return
Fieldbus program
DeviceNet
PROFIBUS
CC-Link Program functions
CANopen
PROFINET
EtherNet/IP
Ethernet Execute program
280 Current load
Ethernet
I/O relay read/write
Monitor output function
RS-232C
Current load
RS-232C Link
I/O relay read/write
“Home position return” and “Execute program” can be performed from DIO when special relay/register
are assigned to the IP memory shown above. You can also display the current load through Ethernet
link.

Function to assign “Special Relay/Register” functions to specified I/O memory.
Assign each function to I/O memory.

To access each I/O memory, refer to the following chapters.
5. Digital Input/Output (DIO)
6. Fieldbus
7.5. Ethernet I/O (Control via Access to Relay/Register)
8. RS-232C

4.1.1 Specifying Method of the I/O Memory
There are 3 methods for specifying the I/O memory address.
1. Specify as the bit unit. Relay number specification

2. Specify as the word unit. Register number specification
3. Specify as the top relay number and the data width specification.
Width with relay number specification.
1. Bit Unit Specifying Method

The bit unit can be specified using the relay number.
Bit number is displayed
Register number is displayed
For example, relay number 101C is shown as below.
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Register number
100
101
102
Relay number: 101C
2. Register (word data) Specifying Method

Word data can be shown by the register number.
Register number is displayed
The data width is 1 word (16-bit) or 2 words (long word) (32-bit).

For example, if the register number is 102 and data width is 2 words, they are displayed as shown
below.
FEDCB A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit Number
Register number
101
Register number: 102 102

Data width: 2 words 103

3. Width Specifying Method
When specifying data that has a width as opposed to a register separation, specify the relay number
and data width.
Register number FEDCB A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number

100
101
102
Relay number: 1013

Data width: 26
4.1.2 Expressing Register Data

Data of 2 words, 32-bit can be assigned in two consecutive registers. For example, if the current
position (monitor output function) is assigned in register numbers 180 and 181, the data will be output
as follows.
In case of the current position as 100

Register 180 86A0H
100.000  186A0H（100000）
Register 181 0001H will be assigned from the lower register number.
Accordingly, data of two words is transferred in order of the upper word and the lower word (big
endian).
However, data of two words is assigned in I/O memory in order of the lower word and the upper word
(little endian). Note that data will be assigned in Ethernet access in the reversed order of that of result
data transfer.
• Position data is expressed in 0.001mm units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).
Example: Data: 999.999mm  Binary display: 000F423FH
• Load data is expressed in 1N units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).
Example: Data: 200000N (20t)  Binary display: 00030D40 H
• Acceleration data is expressed in 1mm/s2 units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).
Example: Data: 2000mm/s2  Binary display: 000007D0 H

• Speed data is expressed in 0.01mm/s units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).
Example: Data: 200.00mm/s  Binary display: 00004E20 H
• Percentage data is expressed in 1% units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).
Example: Data: 100%  Binary display: 00000064 H

• Time data is expressed in 100 msec units, long word (2 words, 32-bit).
Example: Data: 900000ms (900s) → Binary display: 00002328 H
• Number (program number, step number, alarm/failure number)

Number data is expressed in long word (1 words, 16-bit).
NOTE
• Negative values are indicated as complement of 2.
4.2 Special Relay/Special Register

The special relay and special register are relays and registers that have special functions supplied in
advance by the system. By assigning a special relay/special register to the I/O memory, that function
can be used externally. The “Relay type” is an ON/OFF signal, and the “numerical type” is 2 word
(32-bit) numerical data.
NOTE:
The single function of the special relay/special register can only be assigned to 1 place. For example,
the output for “Completion of mechanical initialization” cannot be output from both DOUT3 and DOUT4
of the digital input/output DIO. Additionally, it cannot be output to both the DIO and Fieldbus. Similarly
with the input function, the same input function cannot be assigned to 2 places, and input cannot be
received from 2 places.
Of course, different functions can be assigned to separate locations. “During mechanical initialize” can
be assigned to DIO, and “completion of mechanical installation” assigned to the Fieldbus.
4.2.1 Common Functions (1) Return to Home Position

Name I/O Type Function
1. Ram Free Input Relay ON: Ram is freed. Servo is OFF, and brake is released.
Command If free is set, the ram may drop due to its weight.
OFF: ram is held.
2. Ram Drive Output Relay ON: Drive Power ON
Power Status OFF: Drive Power OFF

3. Return to Home Input Relay OFF->ON: Mechanical initialize starts.
Position
4. Returning to Output Relay ON during mechanical initialize.
Home Position
5. Completion of Output Relay ON: The mechanical initialization is complete, and it
Mechanical is shown that programs can be run.
Initialization OFF: The mechanical initialization needs to be
performed. After switching the power on, always
perform mechanical initialization once.
6. Program Input Relay The program is suspended when this relay is ON. The
Suspension program being executed is stopped, ready to resume, with
the servo motor ON during the program suspension. To
release the suspension, turn this relay OFF. After a
“program run command” is entered, the program is
executed from the step where the program was suspended.
7. Program Input Relay The program is suspended when this relay is OFF. The
Suspension (B) program being executed is stopped, ready to resume, with
the servo motor ON during the program suspension. To
release the program, turn this relay ON. After a “program
run command” is entered, the program is executed from the
step where the program was suspended.
8. Emergency Input Relay The press makes a sudden stop when this relay is ON. The
Stop servo motor stays ON during the stop. To release the
sudden stop, turn this relay OFF. The program is
terminated.
9. Emergency Input Relay The press makes a sudden stop when this relay is OFF.
Stop (B) The servo motor stays ON during the stop. To release the
sudden stop, turn this relay ON. The program is terminated.
10. Status: Urgent Output Relay This signal turns ON from either the [Urgent Stop] or
Stop [Urgent Stop (B)] command. This does not turn ON with an
emergency stop (200 V OFF) (the output status does not
change). Monitor the [State of Motor Driving Power] or
[Status: Program Suspension] signals.
11. Status:Program Output Relay This signal turns ON from the [Program Suspension] or
Suspension [Program Suspension (B)] command, or an emergency
stop (200 V OFF).
Control Power
Drive Power
2. Ram Drive Power

Condition
3. Return to Home
Pos.
4. Returning to
Home Position
5. Completion of
mechanical initialization

4.2.2 Common Functions (2) Errors
Name Input/Output Type Function
Output Relay type ON when a warning occurs.
1. Warning Refer to “5.2 Error Number List” in Setup
and Maintenance manual.
Output Relay type ON if the press is working properly. OFF if a
malfunction or alarm has occurred. If an
alarm occurs, the normal state is returned
by removing the cause and resetting the
2. Working
alarm. If a malfunction occurs, it is
properly
necessary to switch the power off and on
again.
NOTE: Wait 30 seconds or more before
turning the controller power back ON.
3. Alarm Output Relay type ON when an alarm occurs.
4. Alarm Reset Input Relay type Alarm is reset.
Output Numerical type Displays the most recent warning or alarm.
Alarm #1 Refer to “5.2 Error Number List” in the
Setup and Maintenance manual.
Alarm #2 Output Numerical type Second newest alarm.
Alarm #3 Output Numerical type Third newest alarm.
Alarm #4 Output Numerical type Fourth newest alarm.
Alarm #5 Output Numerical type Fifth newest alarm.
Alarm #6 Output Numerical type Sixth newest alarm.
Alarm #7 Output Numerical type Seventh newest alarm.
Alarm #8 Output Numerical type Eighth newest alarm.
Control Power
Drive Power
1. Warning
2. Working Properly
3. Alarm
4. Alarm Reset

4.2.3 Common Functions (3) Mode and Calendar
Calendar Year Output Numerical Year (YYYY) display YYYY: 2000-2099
type
Calendar month/date Output Numerical Month Date (MMDD) display MM: 1-12
type DD: 1-31
Calendar Time Output Numerical Hours Minutes (Hamm) Display
type HH: 0-23 mm: 0-59
Software Ver. AA Output Numerical Software Ver. number
type Ver. AA.BB.CC
Software Ver. BB Output Numerical
type
Software Ver. CC Output Numerical
type
4.2.4 Program Running

These input signals can be received in conditions other than those shown below.
• During setting data transmission
• During setting with PC
• During setting with Pendant Unit

Specifies the program number of the
program executed by Start Program.
Numerical
1. Program Number Input When “Set Program Number” is changed
type
from OFF  ON, this program number is
read.
When this signal is changed from OFF
2. Set Program Number Input Relay type
ON, the program number is read.*
After reading the program number using
3. Set Program Number Response
Relay type Set Program Number, turn this signal ON
ACK Output
as the response signal.
Outputs the program number entered
using Set Program Number.
4. The Program number
Numerical At present, this means the set program
setting value which Output
type number, and when “Start Program” is
has been set
turned OFF  ON, this program starts
running.
OFF  ON: Moves to the Program Home
Position.
5. Go to the Program
Input Relay type When setting the “Return On/Off”
Home Position
parameter to “Invalid”, moves to the
mechanical home position.
*If it takes time until the DIO signal becomes stable, secure time between program number setting and
read command.

6. During go to the ON: During the go to the Program Home
Program Home Output Relay type Position
Position
The character strings set at the program
run will be displayed in JP-S Sampler as a
work serial number. These occupy
7. Work serial number
registers 1 – 16 (32 ASCII characters
max.). Enter 0 (Null) for any unused
registers.
This turns ON when the program for the
selected program number ([The Program
8. Program Exists Output Relay type Number which has Already Been Set –
OUT]) exists. If there is no program data,
this signal is OFF.
1. Program Number
2. Set Program Number
3. Set Program Number

ACK
4. The Program Number

value which has been set
5. Go to the Program Home

Position
6. During go to the Home

Position

1. Inhibit Program Input Relay ON: Instructs to ignore Start Program.
Execution type OFF: Instructs to receive Start Program.
2. During Inhibiting the Output Relay ON: Program Start is being ignored
Program Execution type OFF: Program Start is not being ignored
When OFF, it shows that execution of the
program is not being prohibited.
3. Start Program Input Relay OFF ON: Program run is executed for
type the program displayed as the execute
program number. The program is executed
from the approach in order. Operation is
restarted after the emergency temporary
stop.
If this is switched to OFF after operation
has started, it does not stop.
It is necessary to switch to OFF before the
next start command. If the following
program is started when ON, the operation
is not started OFF  ON edge trigger.
4. Waiting for the Start of Output Relay ON: Waiting for the program to start
the Program type operating.
5. Executing the Program Output Relay ON: Program running is being executed.
type
1. Inhibit Program
Execution
2. During Inhibiting the

Program Execution
3. Start Program
4. Waiting for the Start of the

Program
Does not start
5. Executing the Program

1. Hold at Probe Input Relay type ON: Stops when probe is completed (when the
End touching load is reached).
OFF: The following steps are continued after
probe has ended.
2. During Output Relay type ON: During approach.
Approach
3. During Probe Output Relay type ON: During probe.
4. During the Output Relay type ON: During the pressing.
Pressing
5. During the Output Relay type ON: During the pressure holding.
Pressure
holding
1. Hold at Probe End

Stop
Drive
2. During Approach
3. During Probe
4. During the Driving

Pressure
5. During the Driving

Holding
Executing the Program

1. Executing Step Output Numerical The step number that is during the pressing or
Number type during the pressure holding is output.
2. Executing Step Output Relay Rewrite timing is OFF for the executing step
Number Strobe type number. If time is required for the signal of the
digital input/output (DIO) to stabilize, make sure
that the executing program number is read when
this signal is ON.
During approach
During probe
During the driving pressure
During the pressure holding
1. Executing Step Number
2. Executing Step Number strobe

1. OK of Output Relay OFF  ON: When the program running is complete, and all
Judgment type of the judges executed during that program are not at fault.
ONOFF: When the program running is started
Results
2. NG of Output Relay OFF ON: When the program running is complete, at least
Judgment type one of the judges executed during that program has a fault.
ONOFF: When the program running is started
Results
1. OK of Judgment Results
2. NG of Judgment Results

Program normal end Output Relay OFF->ON: The program is complete
type without any emergency stops, and all
results (judgments) were not “Fault”.
OFF->ON: When a program is executed.
Program abnormal end Output Relay OFF->ON: The program is complete with
type at least one emergency stop, or “Fault”
judgment (result).
OFF->ON: When a program is executed.
Result Data Connection Output Relay ON: A client that can receive result data is
Status type
connected to the press. Result data can
be sent to the client every program run.
OFF: A client that can receive result data
is not connected to the press.
This signal turns ON/OFF according to

the client status regardless of the settings
in [Parameter]  [Mode of the saving
result data].
Result Data Capacity Output Relay This signal turns ON when the Result
Warning (0003) type Data Capacity Warning (0003) occurs.
Result Data Overwrite Output Relay This signal turns ON when the Result
Warning (0006) type Data Overwrite Warning (0006) occurs.
Result data delete function Input Relay OFF->ON: To delete saved Result data
type (Quality control data and time-series data)
in Electro Press. The deleted data cannot
be read from JP-S Sampler.
Deleting Result data Output Relay ON: Deleting the Result data.
type ON->OFF: Finished deleting the Result
data.
10ms(MIN)
Result data
delete function
10ms (MAX) 100ms (MIN)
Deleting
result data
“Deleting Result data” is processed when the press is in “waiting program” status, and not
sending or receiving any data. Therefore, “Deleting Result data” can be delayed when
sending/receiving any Result data or programs (later than 100ms)
To prevent the delay, execute “Deleting Result Data” when the Press is not sending/receiving
any data.

4.2.5 Entering the Work Serial Number
For instance, “ABCDEF0123456789” is entered as a work serial number by setting the following
character strings to the register. Set the work serial number in 8 parts to the 8 registers starting with
100H.
REG 100H ＡＢ
REG 101H ＣＤ
REG 102H ＥＦ
REG 103H
０１
REG 104H
２３
REG 105H
４５
REG 106H
６７
REG 107H
８９
If the work serial number is shorter than 32 characters, fill the blanks with 00H (Hexadecimal). To enter
“ABCDEF01”, set the following character strings to the register. Set the work serial number in 8 parts to
the 8 registers starting with 100H.
REG 100H ＡＢ
REG 101H ＣＤ
REG 102H ＥＦ
REG 103H
０１
REG 104H
00H 00H
REG 105H
00H 00H
REG 106H
00H 00H
REG 107H
00H 00H

4.2.6 External Running
Input/
Name Type Function
Output
1. External Running Input Relay type ON: Drives to the target location at the drive
with the Position speed.
OFF: Ends with the external command position
drive
External Running with Input Relay type ON: Drives only for the target distance at the
the Distance drive speed.
OFF: Ends with the external command distance
drive
External Running with Input Relay type ON: Drives to the target load at the drive speed.
the Load OFF: Ends with the external command load drive
2. The Speed of Input Numerical Specifies the speed for driving according to
External Running type external command operation.
0.00 – Max. speed (Approaching/Returning)
3. The Target Position Input Numerical Sets the target location for driving according to
of External Running type external command operation.
0.000 – 999.999mm
The Target Distance of Input Numerical Sets the target distance for driving according to
-999.999 – 999.999mm
The Target Load of Input Numerical Sets the target load for driving according to
0-Maximum Load
4. During External Output Relay type
ON: During external running.
Running
Stops when the command is OFF
1. External Running with the

Position
2. External Running Target
Speed
3. The Target Position of

External Running
4. During External Running
Arrival at target location
NOTE: The values for acceleration and deceleration during external running are fixed values (default
approach) for each model. You cannot change the value. Refer to the chart below for the
default approach.
Acceleration/Deceleration
Model Name
(Default Approach)
JP-S0501 – JP-S5001 2000mm/s2
JP-S10T1 500mm/s2
JP-S20T1 250mm/s2

4.2.7 Monitor Output Function
Monitor output can be executed at any time after completion of mechanical initialization (see shared
function in 4.2.1).

Current Position Output Numerical Outputs the current position.
type
Current load Output Numerical Outputs the current load.
type
Reference Number Output Numerical Outputs the reference number of data monitor
of Data Monitor type
Strobe Signal of Output Relay Rewrite timing is OFF for the monitor data.
Data Monitor type NOTE: If time is required for the signal to
stabilize, make sure that the monitor data is read
when this signal is ON.
The monitor output data is updated via the [Parameter] – [Monitor I/O Updating Cycle] values in JP-S
Designer.
In order to read the data accurately, the “Reference Number of Data Monitor” is linked to the data
update for output. The reference number of data monitor operates cyclically after returning to the home
position is complete, as in 0655350.
If this reference number of data monitor is not changed between before and after data read, it is
considered that the data was read correctly (data rewrite did not occur midway).
Also, it is considered that this reference number of data monitor can be indexed and read for data
management.
10ms
Strobe Signal of
Data Monitor
Data
1 2 3 4 5
Reference Number
of Data Monitor
Update cycle
Program running
Update cycle
50ms, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 1000ms
Set in the system parameters

4.2.8 JOG Functions
JOG1 (-) Relay JOG moving is performed according to the
Input
command type parameters set in JOG environment setting. Refer to
JOG1 (+) Relay the diagram below for moving timing.
Input
Command type
JOG2 Relay Perform JOG move to the target location. Refer to the
Input
Command type diagram below for moving timing.
JOG2 Target Numerical
Input
Position type
JOG3 Relay Perform JOG move to the target load. Refer to the
Input
Command type diagram below for moving timing.
JOG3 Target Numerical
Input
Load type
During JOG Relay ON: During JOG moving.
Output
Moving type
 JOG Moving timing

Operates at
JOG Inching 800ms JOG speed 800ms
Distance
500ms (max)
JOG +
(+ Command)
JOG -
(- Command)
Ram + (Jog +)
Ram - (Jog -)
“JOG Speed” and “JOG Inching Distance” follow the settings in “JOG Environment Settings”.
Refer to “2.3 JOG Environment Settings”.

4.2.9 Program Setting Register
This section explains function of program setting through I/O memory.
The following operations can be made with the register.
• To add or delete a program
• To add or delete a step
• To add or delete a Step sensor
• To rewrite or read setting value of the program, step or Step sensor.
A set of plural consecutive memories is used as “program setting register”. The following numbers of
register are required.
• Input register: 10 words

• Output register: 4 words
Input or output I/O memory is not assigned in 14-word registers which are individually specified.
It is assigned in the area from the top register number and automatically secured consecutive
numbers.
Input 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119 (10 words)
Output 190, 191, 192, 193 (4 words)
In the further explanations, each number (register address) will be shown as follows.
Input top+0, Input top+1, input top+2, ······, input top+9
Output top+0, output top+2, output top+3
Operation is specified by the command code of “input top+1”, however, it will be checked if the
command is feasible before executing. Command is feasible if the lowest bit of “output top+0” is 1.
After setting the command code and required parameter (value), set the lowest bit of “input top+0”
word as 0  1and the command will be executed. It is required to maintain the status 1 for 10 msec or
longer.
If the command execution is started, the lowest bit of “output top+0” word becomes 0: busy.
After operation is ended and it will be returned the lowest bit will be returned to 1: ready. In case an
error occurs, the bit1 of “output top+1” word becomes 1: error. Check the error code of “output top+1”
and solve the problem.
The next page shows a program creation register flowchart and timing chart.

Start
Ready?
“Output top+0” word NO
Lowest bit 1?
YES
Set command code and parameter
Execute command
Set lowest bit of “input top+0” word as 0  1
Wait for 10msec or longer
Ready?
Lowest bit 1?
YES
Set lowest bit of “input top+0” word as 1  0
Error?
Bit1 1?
YES
Solve error code of “output top+1” word
End

Parameter
Command code
10msec or longer
Execute command
Can be executed
Error code
Save the data after modifying program

After adding/deleting program, adding/deleting step, adding/deleting Step sensor or rewriting value, the
modified data should be written to the FROM.
This is because each data is modified in the work area and data in the work area will be deleted when
the control power supply is turned off.
The data can be saved in the FROM by executing “command code 1000H: saving set data (write to
the FROM”. The modified data is maintained if the control power supply is turned off.
It will take approximately maximum 10msec to rewrite or read the data.

It may take approximately maximum 100msec to add or delete the data.
It will take several seconds – maximum 30 seconds to save the set data (to write to the FROM). If it
takes long to execute the command, check error code after the status of “ready” (after operation).

 Input register
Address Name Function
Input top+0 Execute command Use turning the lowest bit ON/OFF (relay)
Turn this signal OFF  ON and execute the
command
Input top+1 Command code 0000H: Add program
0001H: Delete program
0004H: Write program data
0005H: Read program data
0040H: Add step
0041H: Delete step
0044H: Write step data
0045H: Read step data
0060H: Add step data judgment
0061H: Delete step data judgment
0064H: Add step data judgment data
0065H: Read step data judgment data
1000H: Save set data (Write to FROM)
Input top+2 ID1 (program number) Specify program number
Input top+3 ID2 (step number) Specify step number
Input top+4 ID3 (judgment number) Specify judgment number
Input top+5 System reserve Extra
Input top+6 Item number Refer to and specify the number from “Item” in the
editing table.
Input top+7 System reserve Extra
Input top+8 Data (lower) Lower word of data to be written
Input top+9 Data (upper) Upper word of data to be written

 Output register
Output top+0 Command bit0 Lowest bit Command executing (0: busy 1: Ready)
executing bit1 Error (0:Normal 1:Error)
Output top+1 Error code 0: Normal
2: Command error
- Command with no function assigned was specified.
3: Add error
- Exceeded the maximum number.
- Step or step sensor was added to non-existent program.
4: Delete error
- No data to be deleted
5: Out of range of setting data
- Entered value exceeding maximum or minimum value of
the item.
6: Write error
- Wrote to non-existent program or non-existent step data.
- Wrote to non-existent item number.
7: Read error
- Read non-existent program or non-existent step data.
- Read non-existent item number.
8: Out of program number range
- During adding or deleting program
9:Program running error
- Entered add/delete command during running
Output top+2 Data (lower) Lower word of data to be read
Output top+3 Data (upper) Upper word of data to be read

Setting range may vary among models and maximum strokes.
 Setting range among models
Value Type Affected Function Setting Value Minimum Value Maximum Value
Load Value Model Name JP-S0501-00 5kN
JP-S0501-01 5kN
JP-S0501-11 5kN
JP-S1001-00 10kN
JP-S1001-01 10kN
JP-S1001-11 10kN
JP-S1501-00 15kN
JP-S2001-00 20kN
JP-S2001-01 0N 20kN
JP-S2001-11 20kN
JP-S3001-00 30kN
JP-S3001-11 30kN
JP-S5001-00 50kN
JP-S5R01-00 50kN
JP-S10T1-00 100kN
JP-S10R1-00 100kN
JP-S20T1-00 200kN
Position Maximum Stroke 100mm 100mm
150mm 150mm
200mm 200mm
250mm 250mm
0mm
300mm 300mm
350mm 350mm
400mm 400mm
450mm 450mm
Distance Maximum Stroke 100mm -100mm 100mm
150mm -150mm 150mm
200mm -200mm 200mm
250mm -250mm 250mm
300mm -300mm 300mm
350mm -350mm 350mm
400mm -400mm 400mm
450mm -450mm 450mm
Speed Model Name JP-S0501-00 216mm/s
JP-S0501-01 216mm/s
JP-S0501-11 216mm/s
JP-S1001-00 216mm/s
JP-S1001-01 208mm/s
JP-S1001-11 208mm/s
JP-S1501-00 200mm/s
JP-S2001-00 200mm/s
JP-S2001-01 0.01mm/s 160mm/s
JP-S2001-11 160mm/s
JP-S3001-00 210mm/s
JP-S3001-11 210mm/s
JP-S5001-00 200mm/s
JP-S5R01-00 200mm/s
JP-S10T1-00 100mm/s
JP-S10R1-00 100mm/s
JP-S20T1-00 50mm/s

NOTE: The maximum value of speed is the ram speed at the time of approach and return. Take
caution as the maximum speed at pressing is different.
Acceleration/ Model Name JP-S0501-00
Deceleration JP-S0501-01
JP-S0501-11
JP-S1001-00
JP-S1001-01
JP-S1001-11
JP-S1501-00
3500mm/s2
JP-S2001-00
JP-S2001-01 1mm/s2
JP-S2001-11
JP-S3001-00
JP-S3001-11
JP-S5001-00
JP-S5R01-00
JP-S10T1-00
600mm/s2
JP-S10R1-00
JP-S20T1-00 300mm/s2
To invalidate function of the item with register specified, set data width as 0. It is the same condition as
no relay number set.
Default register number and default data width of new data is as follows.
Value Default
Relay number 0FFF
Data width 0(Function is invalid)
 0000H: Add program

To add a program (with a step of drive)
Add a program by entering the program number in “Input top+2” and the drive mode of the first step in
“Input top+6 (item number)”.

Input top+1 Command code 0000H: Add program
Input top+2 ID1(Program number) Specify the program number.
Input top+6 Item number Specify the drive mode.
1: Const Speed/Stop at the set pos.
2: Const Speed/Stop at the set dis.
3: Const Speed/Stop at the set load
4: Const Speed/Stop at the set inc. load
5: Const Speed/Stop on the event (under development)
6: Const Load/Stop after set time (under development)
7: Const Load/Stop at set pos.(under development)
8: Const Load/Stop at set dis.(under development)
9: Const Load/Stop on the event
Set “Input top+3 (step number)”, “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)”, “Input top+8 (lower data)” and
“Input top+9 (upper data)” as 0.

 0001H: Delete program
To delete a program
Delete a program by specifying the program number in “Input top+2”.
 0004H: Write program data

 0005H: Read program data
Write or read program data by specifying the program number in “Input top+2” and the item number in
“Input top+6”.
Set values will be written in “Input top+8 (lower data)” “Input top+9 (upper data)” in writing.
Values will be read in “Output top+2 (lower data)” and “Output top+3 (upper data)”.
Item Item no. Setting Range / Selection

Prog. Home Position 0 Model (Position)
Approach Y/N 1 1:Enable 0:Disable
Approach Speed 2 Model (Speed)
Approach Acc. 3 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Approach Dec. 4 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Begin Position 5 Model (Position)
Max. Pressure (Approach) 6 Model (Load)
Probe Y/N 7 1:Enable 0:Disable
Probe Speed 8 Model(Speed)
Probe Acc. 9 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Probe Dec. 10 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Touching Load 11 Model(Load)
Probe Limit Pos. 12 Model(Position)
Return to Prog. Home Y/N 13 1:Enable 0:Disable
Return Speed 14 Model(Speed)
Return Acc. 15 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Return Dec. 16 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
0: Max. Load Error (2007)
Max. Pressure (Approach) 17 1: Max. Load Over (1000)
2: End of Step
18 Register number
Touching Position(OUT)
19 Bit width
20 Register number
Touching Load(OUT)
21 Bit width

 0040H: Add step
Add a step by specifying the program number in “Input top+2” and the drive mode in “Input top+6(Item
number)”.

Input top+1 Command code 0040H: Add step
Input top+2 ID1 (Program number) Specify program number
Input top+6 Item number Specify drive mode
1: Const Speed/Stop at the set pos.
2: Const Speed/Stop at the set dis.
3: Const Speed/Stop at the set load
4: Const Speed/Stop at the set inc. load
5: Const Speed/Stop on the event
6: Const Load/Stop after set time
7: Const Load/Stop at set pos
8: Const Load/Stop at set dis
9: Const Load/Stop on the event
NOTE
• Step number cannot be designated. Step is added to the end and cannot be inserted in the middle.
 0041H:Delete step
Delete a step by specifying the program number in “Input top+2”.
Set “Input top+3 (step number)”, “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)”, Input top +6 (item number ),
“Input top+8 (lower data)” and “Input top+9 (upper data)” as 0.
NOTE
• Step number cannot be designated. The last step is deleted in “Delete step” Step in the middle
cannot be deleted.
 0044H: Write step data

 0045H: Read step data
Write or read step data by specifying the program number in “Input top+2” and the step number in
“Input top+3”.
Set “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)” as 0. Item number varies depending on drive mode of the step.
Drive mode (Item number0) is only for reading. Drive mode cannot be written. To change drive mode,
delete the current drive mode and specify the new drive model

 Const Speed/Stop at the set pos. data
Item
Item Setting Range / Selection
number
Drive mode 0 1: Const Speed/Stop at the set pos.
Speed 1 Model (Speed)
Acceleration 2 1 – Maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Deceleration 3 1 – Maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Max. Pressure 4 Model (Load)
Action at Max. Pressure Malfunction/Error/End of Step
End Position 5 Model (Position)
Holding Time 6 0.0 – 999.9s
Step End Mode 7 0: Standard, 1: Connect
 Const Speed/Stop at the set dis. data

Item
number
Drive mode 0 2: Const Speed/Stop at the set dis.
Max. Pressure 4 Model (Load)
Action at Max. Pressure Malfunction/Error/End of Step
Pressing Distance 5 Model (Distance)
Holding Time 6 0.0-999.9s
Distance Start Value 8 0: Last step end position 1: Register Ref.
Register Number of Distance 9 Register number
Origin Position 10 Bit width
 Const Speed/Stop at the set load data

Item
number
Drive mode 0 3: Const Speed/Stop at the set load
Descending Limit Pos. 4 Model (Position)
End Load 5 Model (Load)
Slow Down Load Rate 6 0 – 100%
Stop Ref. Pos'n 7 Model (Position)

 Const Speed/Stop at the set inc. load data
Item
number
Drive mode 0 4: Const Speed/Stop at the set inc. load
Increment Load of Value at
5 Model (Load)
End
Slow Down Load Rate 6 0 – 100%
Stop Ref. Pos'n 7 Model (Position)
Distance Start Value 10 0: Last step end position 1: Register Ref.
Register Number of Distance 11 Register number
Origin Position 12 Bit width
 Const Speed/Stop on the event data

Item
number
Drive mode 0 5: Const Speed/Stop on the event
Increment Load of Value at 5 Model (Load)
End
Stop Event 7 Number of Relay
8 Relay 0:Falut 1: OK
 Const Load/Stop after set time

Item
number
Drive mode 0 6: Const Load/Stop after set time
Pressing Load 2 Model (Load)
Pressing Time 3 0.0 – 999.9s
Gain Number 4 1 – 16

 Const Load/Stop at set pos.
Item
number
Drive mode 0 7: Const Load/Stop at set pos.
Max. Speed 1 Model (Speed)
Maximum Pressing Time 2 0.0 – 999.9s
 Const Load/Stop at set dis.

Item
number
Drive mode 0 8: Const Load/Stop at set dis.
Pressing Distance 4 Model (Distance)
Drive Distance Start Value 8 0: End position of previous step 1: Register Ref.
9 Register number
Distance Start Value Number
10 Bit width
 Const Load/Stop on the event

Item
number
Drive mode 0 9: Const Load/Stop on the event
Stop Event 7 Number of relay
8 Relay 0:Falut 1: OK

 0060H: Add Step sensor
Add Step sensor by specifying the program number in “Input top+2”, the step number in “Input top+3”
and the sensor type in “Input top+6 (Item number)”.
Input top+1 Command code 0060H: Add step sensor
Input top+2 ID1 (Program number) Specify program number
Input top+3 ID2 (Step number) Specify step number
Specify sensor type
1:Load Sensor/Given position
2:Load Sensor/Given distance
3:Position Sensor (Start of Step)
4:Peak load Sensor/Given position
5:Peak load Sensor/Given distance
6:Bottom load Sensor/Given position
7:Bottom load Sensor/Given distance
8:Top load Sensor/Given position
9:Top load Sensor/Given distance
10:Valley load Sensor/Given position
Input top+6 Item number 11:Valley load Sensor/Given distance
12:Peak to peak Sensor/Given position
13:Peak to peak Sensor/Given distance
14:DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
15:DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.
18:Position Sensor (End step)
19: Load Sensor/Given dis. (End)
20: Load Sensor(End)
21: Load Path Sensor・Given Pos.
22: Load Path Sensor・Given Dis.
Set “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)” as 0.
Set “Input top+8 (lower data)” and “Input top+9 (upper data)” as 0.
NOTE
• Step sensor number cannot be designated. Step sensor is added to the end and cannot be
inserted in the middle.
 0061H: Delete step sensor

Delete step sensor by specifying the program number in “Input top+2” and the step number in “Input
top+3”.
Set “Input top+4 (Step sensor number)” as 0
Set “Input top+6(Item number)”, “Input top+8(lower data)” and “Input top+9(upper data)” as 0.
NOTE
• Step sensor number cannot be designated. The last step sensor is deleted. Step sensor in the
middle cannot be deleted.

 0064H Write step sensor data
 0065H: Read step sensor data
Write or read step sensor data by specifying the program number in “Input top+2”, the step number in
“Input top+3”,the step sensor number in “Input top+4”, and the item number in “Input top+6”.
Note that items vary depending on step sensor type. Set the item number as 0 to read the sensor type.
Item
number
1:Load Sensor/Given position
2:Load Sensor/Given distance (Start of Step)
3:Position Sensor (Start)
4:Peak load Sensor/Given position
5:Peak load Sensor/Given distance
6:Bottom load Sensor/Given position
7:Bottom load Sensor/Given distance
8:Top load Sensor/Given position
9:Top load Sensor/Given distance
10:Valley load Sensor/Given position
11:Valley load Sensor/Given distance
Sensor type 0 12:Peak to peak Sensor/Given position
13:Peak to peak Sensor/Given distance
18:Position Sensor (End Step)
19: Load Sensor/Given dis. (End)
20: Load Sensor(End)
21: Load Path Sensor・Given Pos.
22: Load Path Sensor・Given Dis.
NOTE
• Sensor type cannot be written. To change sensor type, delete the current sensor type and specify a
sensor type.
Items for each sensor type are shown as below.
 Load Sensor/Given position

Item
number
Sensor type 0 1: Load Sensor/Given position
Action on Sensor Fault 1 0: None, 1: End program, 2: End run on the spot
Sensor OK (OUT) 2 Relay number
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 2:Disable
Sensor Fault (OUT) 4
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Enable 2:Disable
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT)
6
Relay number
7 1: Enable 2:Disable
Relay Y/N

Item
number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT)
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
The Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Model (Position)
The Position (OUT)
13 Bit width
Start Position 14 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load at Start Pos. 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load at Start Pos. 17 Model (Load)
Upper Lim. Load at End Pos. 18 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load at End Pos. 19 Model (Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 20 0: OK 1: NG
 Load Sensor/Given distance (start of step)

Item
number
Sensor type 0 2: Load Sensor/Given distance
Sensor OK (OUT)Relay Y/N 3 1: Enable 0:Disable
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
The Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
The Distance (OUT)
13 Bit width
Start Distance 14 Model (Distance)
End Distance 15 Model (Distance)
Upper Lim. Load at Start Dis. 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load at Start Dis. 17 Model (Load)
Upper Lim. Load at End Dis. 18 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load at End Dis. 19 Model (Load)

 Position Sensor (Start)
Item
number
Sensor type 0 3: Position Sensor
Action on Sensor Fault 0: None, 1: End program,
1
2: End run on the spot
6
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay Y/N 7 1: Enable 0:Disable
8
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay Y/N 9 1: Enable 0:Disable
10 Register number
The Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
The Position (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Pos. 14 Model (Position)
Lower Limit Pos. 15 Model (Position)
 Peak load Sensor/Given position

Item
number
Sensor type 0 4: Peak load Sensor/Given position
Action on Sensor Fault 0: None, 1: End program,
1
2: End run on the spot
6
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay Y/N 7 1: Enable 0:Disable
8
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay Y/N 9 1: Enable 0:Disable
10 Register number
Reg. Num of Peak Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Peak Position (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Start Pos. 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load of Peak 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Peak 17 Model (Load)

 Peak load Sensor/Given distance
Item
number
Sensor type 0 5: Peak load Sensor/Given distance
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
Reg.Num of Peak Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg.Num of Peak Dis (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Start Distance 14 Model (Distance)
Sampling End Distance 15 Model (Distance)
Upper Lim. Load of Peak 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Peak 17 Model (Load)
 Bottom load Sensor/Given position

Item
number
Sensor type 0 6: Bottom load Sensor/Given position
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
Reg. Num of Bottom Load(OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Bottom Position (OUT)
13 Bit width

Item
number
Upper Lim. Load of Bottom 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Bottom 17 Model (Load)）
 Bottom load Sensor/Given distance

Item
number
Sensor type 0 7: Bottom load Sensor/Given distance
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Bottom Dis (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Lim. Load of Bottom 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Bottom 17 Model (Load)

 Top load Sensor/Given position
Item
number
Sensor type 0 8: Top load Sensor/Given position
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
Reg. Num of Top Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Top Pos. (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Start Position. 14 Model (Position)
Sampling End Position 15 Model (Position)
Sampling End Pos. 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Top 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault on No Top 19 0: NG 1: OK
Top Load Sensor (OUT) 20
Top Load Sensor Relay Y/N 21 1: Enable 0:Disable
Judg. Value of Load UP 22 Model (0 – max load)
Judg. Value of Load Dec. 23 Model (- max load – 0)
 Top load Sensor/Given distance

Item
number
Sensor type 0 9: Top load Sensor/Given distance
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N

Item
number
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Top Dis (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Lim. Load of Top 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Top 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault on No Top 19 0: NG 1: OK
Top Load Sensor Relay Y/N 21 1: Enable 0:Disable
 Valley load Sensor/Given position

Item
number
Sensor type 0 10: Valley load Sensor/Given position
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
Reg. Num of Valley Load (OUT) 10 Register number
Register number 11 Bit width
Reg. Num of Valley Pos. (OUT) 12 Register number
Register number 13 Bit width
Upper Lim. Load of Valley 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Valley 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault on No Valley 19 0: NG 1: OK
Valley Sensor (OUT) 20
Valley Sensor Relay Y/N 21 1: Enable 0:Disable

 Valley load Sensor/Given distance
Item
number
Sensor type 0 11: Valley load Sensor/Given distance
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
Reg. Num of Valley Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Valley Dis (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Lim. Load of Valley 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of Valley 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault on No Valley 19 0: NG 1: OK
Valley Sensor (OUT) Relay Y/N 21 1: Enable 0:Disable
 P- P Sensor/Given position
Item
number
Sensor type 0 12: Peak to peak Sensor/Given position
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N

Item
number
10 Register number
Reg. Num of P-P Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
Upper Lim. Load of P-P 14 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of P-P 15 Model (Load)
 P - P Sensor/Given distance
Item
number
Sensor type 0 13: Peak to peak Sensor/Given distance
6
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) 1: Enable 0:Disable
7
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) 1: Enable 0:Disable
9
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
11 Bit width
Sampling Start Distance. 12 Model (Distance)
Upper Lim. Load of P-P 14 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of P-P 15 Model (Load)

 DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
Item
number
Sensor type 0 14: DIF1 Sensor/Given Pos.
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) 6
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) 7
1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) 8
Relay number
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) 9
1: Enable 0:Disable
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
Reg. Num of DIF Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of DIF Pos. (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Lim. Load of DIF1 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load of DIF1 17 Model(Load)
Slant Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/s
OK/Fault when Out of Sen.
19 0: OK 1: NG
Area
OK/Fault on No DIF 20 0: NG 1: OK
DIF Sensor (OUT) 21
DIF Sensor Relay Y/N 22 1: Enable 0:Disable
 DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.

Item
number
Sensor type 0 15: DIF1 Sensor/Given dis.
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N

Item
number
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
13 Bit width
Lower Lim. Load of DIF1 17 Model (Load)
Slant Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/s
DIF Sensor (OUT) 21
 DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.

Item
number
Sensor type 0 16: DIF2 Sensor/Given Pos.
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
13 Bit width
Slant Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/mm
DIF Sensor (OUT) 21

 DIF2 Sensor/Given Distance
Item
number
Sensor type 0 17: DIF2 Sensor/Given dis.
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
13 Bit width
Slant Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/mm
OK/Fault when Out of Sen.
19 0: OK 1: NG
Area
OK/Fault on No DIF 20 0: OK 1: NG
DIF Sensor (OUT) 21
 Position Sensor (End)

Item
number
Sensor type 0 18: Position Sensor (End Steps)
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N

Item
number
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Pos. 14 Model (Position)
Lower Limit Pos. 15 Model (Position)
 Load Sensor/Given dis.(End)

Item
number
Sensor type 0 19: Load Sensor/Given dis.(End)
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
The Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
The Distance (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sensor Begin Dis. 14 Model (Distance)
Sensor End Dis. 15 Model (Distance)
Upper Lim. Load at Begin Dis. 16 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load at Begin Dis. 17 Model (Load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 20 0: NG 1: OK

 Load Sensor (End)
Item
number
Sensor type 0 20: Load Sensor (End)
6
Relay number
Relay Y/N
8
Relay number
Relay Y/N
10 Register number
The Load(OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
The Position (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Load 14 Model (Load)
Lower Limit Load 15 Model (Load)
 Load Path Sensor・Given Pos.

Item
number
Sensor type 0 21: Load Path Sensor・Given Pos.
6 Register number
Load of Entrance(OUT)
7 Bit width
8 Register number
Pos. of Entrance(OUT)
9 Bit width
10 Register number
Load of Exit (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Position of Exit (OUT)
13 Bit width
OK Path Selection 14 0: A Path, 1: B Path, 2: C Path
Start Position 15 Model (Position)
Upper Lim. Load at Begin Pos. 17 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load at Begin Pos. 18 Model (Load)
Upper Lim. Load at End Pos. 19 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load at End Pos. 20 Model (Load)

Item
number
OK/Fault when Out of Sen. Area 21 0: OK, 1: NG
 Load Path Sensor・Given Dis.

Item
number
Sensor type 0 22: Load Path Sensor・Given Pos.
6 Register number
Load of Entrance(OUT)
7 Bit width
8 Register number
Pos. of Entrance(OUT)
9 Bit width
10 Register number
Load of Exit (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Position of Exit(OUT)
13 Bit width
Path Type 14 0: A Path, 1: B Path, 2: C Path
Sensor Begin Dis. 15 Model (Distance)
Sensor End Dis. 16 Model (Distance)
Upper Lim. Load at Begin Dis. 17 Model (Load)
Lower Lim. Load at Begin Dis. 18 Model (Load)
 1000H: Save Set Data (Write to FROM)

This command is to write to FROM (Flash ROM) the result value of adding/deleting program,
adding/deleting step or adding/deleting step judgment.
Each datum is modified in the work area and the data in the work area is deleted if the control power
supply is turned off. Be sure to write the modified data to FROM.
Set all the registers other than “Input top+1” as 0.

5. DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT (DIO)
There are 17 input and 16 output photo coupler digital input/outputs (optional). From this point onwards,
these will be referred to as “DIO”. DIO are factory options, and can be selected from the following 3
types (including “none”).
• 0: None
• N: NPN Specifications (Sink Input/Output Specifications)
• P: PNP Specifications (Source input/output specifications)
5.1 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Connectors

The connector shapes are the same for NPN specification and PNP specification devices.
To use the digital input/output, the following connectors need to be assembled, or the following cables
need to be used.
 DIO Connector
Connector: DC-37PF-N (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry Ltd. (JAE))

Shell: DC-C8-J13-F2-1R (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry Ltd. (JAE))

 DIO Cable
JANOME Order No.:140567007 (2m), 140567100 (3m), 140567203 (5m)

Refer to “DIO Cable Insulation Colors List” on the next page for the insulation color.
 Digital Input/Output (DIO) Connector Figure
19 1
37 20
Photo coupler output is used for the output. Use 100mA or less (when DC24V is used) per pin.
 DIO Connector Pin Assignment

Address Address
Pin No Name Pin No Name
(Relay number) (Relay number)
COM+(DC24 20 DOUT3 0702
1 －
V) 21 DOUT4 0703
2 DIN1 0000 22 DOUT5 0704
3 DIN2 0001 23 DOUT6 0705
4 DIN3 0002 24 DOUT7 0706
5 DIN4 0003 25 DOUT8 0707
6 DIN5 0004 26 DOUT9 0708
7 DIN6 0005 27 DOUT10 0709
8 DIN7 0006 28 DOUT11 070A
9 DIN8 0007 29 DOUT12 070B
10 DIN9 0008 30 DOUT13 070C
11 DIN10 0009 31 DOUT14 070D
12 DIN11 000A 32 DOUT15 070E
13 DIN12 000B 33 DOUT16 070F
14 DIN13 000C 34 DIN17 0010
15 DIN14 000D 35 COM-(GND) －
16 DIN15 000E 36 COM-(GND) －
17 DIN16 000F 37 COM-(GND) －
18 DOUT1 0700
19 DOUT2 0701

 DIO Cable Insulation Colors List
Insulation Spiral Insulation Spiral

Pin No. Pin No.
Color Mark Color Mark
1 Black 20 Black Blue
2 White 21 Red White
3 Red 22 Red Black
4 Green 23 Red Green
5 Yellow 24 Red Blue
6 Brown 25 Green White
7 Blue 26 Green Black
8 Gray 27 Green Red
9 Orange 28 Green Blue
10 Peach 29 Yellow White
11 Light Blue 30 Yellow Black
12 Purple 31 Yellow Red
13 White Black 32 Yellow Green
14 White Red 33 Yellow Blue
15 White Green 34 Brown White
16 White Blue 35 Brown Black
17 Black White 36 Brown Red
18 Black Red 37 Brown Green
19 Black Green

5.2 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Circuit
 DIO, NPN Specifications (Sink Input/Output Specifications), Input Circuit
DIO 24V External

power supply
COM+
(DC24V)
2.2K
DIN1-
DIN17
NOTE: Do not use a two-wire external device such as a sensor. It may not operate correctly.
 DIO, NPN Specifications (Sink Input/Output Specifications), Output Circuit
DIO 24V External

power supply
DOUT1- +
DOUT16 External
- Device
COM-
(GND)
• Output capacity for 1 pin is 100mA or less (when DC24V is used)

 DIO, PNP Specifications (Source Input/Output Specifications), Input Circuit
DIO 24V External

power supply
DIN1-
DIN17
2.2K COM-
(GND)
NOTE: Do not use a two-wire external device such as a sensor. It may not operate correctly.
 DIO, PNP Specifications (Source Input/Output Specifications), Output Circuit
24V External power supply
DIO
COM+
(DC24V)
+
DOUT1- External
DOUT16 - Device
• Output capacity for each pin is 100mA or less (when DC24V is used)

5.3 Digital Input/Output (DIO)Settings
Setting
Item Unit Function
Range/Selections
Presence of Digital
Valid/Invalid ― Is there a digital input/output?
Input/Output (DIO)
I/O Software filter 5 / 10 / 20 / 50 msec I/O Sampling Time Settings
This is an option for the Digital Input/Output (DIO) and Digital Input/Output should be set in the
software. If Digital Input/Output (DIO) is to be used, this setting must be set to “ON”. This will not
function correctly if “Off” is set.
Additionally, there is a function to adjust the sampling time (I/O software filter). Set the sampling time
longer to reduce noise.
These settings are performed with the PC software (JP-S Designer). For details on the setting
procedure, refer to “4.1 Control by Relay/Register (I/O Memory)”.
5.4 Digital Input/Output (DIO) Function Assignment

By assigning special relay and special register functions to the addresses (relay numbers), operating
start and status output can be performed from the Digital Input/Output (DIO).
There are no functions assigned when the press is shipped from the factory.
Refer to “4.1 Control by Relay/Register (I/O Memory)”.
If assignments are made using [Automatic I/O Assignment]  [DIO 1] in the [Edit] tab of the PC
Software JP-S Designer, functions will be assigned as shown on the next page.

Address
Function Name Pin No
(Relay number)
0000 Program Number – IN B0 DIN1 2
0007 Program Number Set – IN DIN8 9
0008 Return to Program Home Position – IN DIN9 10
0009 Program Run – IN DIN10 11
000A Probe - IN DIN11 12
000B －－－－ DIN12 13
000C －－－－ DIN13 14
000D Program Suspension – IN DIN14 15
000E Return to Home Position – IN DIN15 16
000F Ram Free – IN DIN16 17
0010 Alarm Reset – IN DIN17 34
0700 Program Hold – OUT DOUT1 18
0701 Program Running – OUT DOUT2 19
0702 Approaching – OUT DOUT3 20
0703 Probing DOUT4 21
0704 Pressing DOUT5 22
0705 Pressing Hold Time – OUT DOUT6 23
0706 Sensor OK – OUT DOUT7 24
0707 Sensor Fault – OUT DOUT8 25
0708 Returning to Prog. Home Position – OUT DOUT9 26
0709 －－－－ DOUT10 27
070A Ram Drive Power Supply – OUT DOUT11 28
070B Returning to Home Position – OUT DOUT12 29
070C Returned to Home Position – OUT DOUT13 30
070D Pressing OK – OUT DOUT14 31
070E Alarm – OUT DOUT15 32
070F Program Number Set ACK – OUT DOUT16 33
For example, consider performing return to home position from the Digital Input/Output (DIO).
Four functions related to “Return to Home Position” are assigned to relay number corresponding digital
input/output. If assigned, operation can be executed or status can be read with signals of digital
input/output.
Assignment example is shown below.
Address
Function Name
(Relay number)
070A State of Ram Driving Power – OUT DOUT11
000E Return to Home Position – IN DIN15
070B Returning to Home Position – OUT DOUT12
070C Returned to Home Position – OUT DOUT13

OUT is a signal from JP-S and IN is a signal from an external device to JP-S.
By inputting assigned signals according to the following timing chart, the return to home position
operation can be performed.
Control Power
Drive Power
State of Ram DOUT11

Driving Power
Return to Home DIN15
Position
Return to Home DOUT12
Position
Returned to Home DOUT13
Position
For details on the assignment function, refer to “4.2 Special Relay/Special Register”.

6. FIELDBUS
The fieldbus types are “DeviceNet,” “PROFIBUS,” “CC-Link” and “CC-Link (J),” “CANopen,”
“PROFINET,” and “EtherNet/IP.” The type of connector differs depending on the type of Fieldbus.
Before connecting a Fieldbus, make sure safety can be maintained

at all times when the press is run. If signals such as a start signal
etc., are assigned to the Fieldbus, the Fieldbus may standby waiting
Danger to send signals and cause the press to start running directly after it is
connected. Improper countermeasures for this can cause injury or
unit breakdown.
When you want to communicate using the Fieldbus, turn ON the power to the PLC
you are pairing with before turning ON the power to the JP-S. If power to the JP-S
is turned ON first, internal processing of the communication module cannot be
made and communication cannot commence.
6.1 Fieldbus Overview

There are software settings for the presence of and type of Fieldbus in the options. In order to use the
Fieldbus, the type of Fieldbus needs to be set correctly.
The amount of input/output used for the fieldbus needs to be set. Set the number of input words and
output words. Additional settings are required depending on the type of Fieldbus. See the explanations
for each type of Fieldbus.
Fieldbus
connector

6.2 DeviceNet
 DeviceNet Connector Diagram
1 5
 DeviceNet Pin Assignment
Pin No. Name Function

1 V- Bus Power Ground
2 CAN_L Communication Data Low (CAN Bus Line L)
3 SHIELD Shield Ground
4 CAN_H Communication Data High (CAN Bus Line H)
5 V+ Bus Power Supply (24V)

unit breakdown.
• Connector
Manufacturer: Phoenix Contact
Model Name: TMSTBP 2.5/5-ST5.08
Connector is included. Prepare the cable yourself.
 EDS File
EDS File is a text file including device features and composition option. If required, download the EDS
file to the master unit.
To use the EDS File, use the EDS File in the operation manual CD or download the latest EDS File
from the internet cite of HMS, the manufacturer of Anybus Compact Com.
Name File Name

DeviceNet Setting File ABCC_DEC_V_2_3_JM110705.EDS

There are 2 status LEDs on the module.
Network Status Module Status

LED LED
 Network Status
Condition Details
OFF Offline, or power is not being supplied
Green Online, communication connected
Green, flashing (1Hz) Online, communication disconnected
Red Communication cannot be performed
Red, flashing (1Hz) Communication timeout
Alternating between
Self-test
red/green
 Module Status
Condition Details
OFF Power is not being supplied
Green Normal communication is being performed
Green, flashing (1Hz) Settings are incorrect
Red Critical failure
Recoverable failure, recovery possible by changing settings
Red, flashing (1Hz)
etc.
Alternating between
Self-test
red/green

 DeviceNet Settings
Setting
Setting Items Function
Range/Selections
Type of fieldbus connecting the main unit and external
Type of Fieldbus Device Net
device
The Node addresses can be set between 0-63. The
DeviceNet slave is classified from the Node addresses.
Node addresses 0-63
When multiple slaves are connected, select and set an
empty Node addresses.
The Baud rate can be selected and set from
Auto/125kbps/250kbps/500kbps. Set to match the Baud
Auto/125/
Baud rate rate of the network to be used. When Auto is selected,
250/500
communication will be automatically set to the master
Baud rate.
Word number output is the amount of data output (press
writes (sends), external PLC reads (receives)). Set the
0-126* necessary amount of data in words (1 word is 2 bytes).
No. of output words
(DeviceNet) For DeviceNet, you can set a maximum up to 126 words.
As the amount of data increases, so does the amount of
time to transfer data, decreasing the responsiveness.
Word number input is the amount of data input (external
PLC writes (sends), press reads (receives)). Set the
0-126 necessary amount of data in words (1 word is 2 bytes).
No. of input words
(DeviceNet) For DeviceNet, you can set up to 126 words. As the
amount of data increases, so does the amount of time to
transfer data, decreasing the responsiveness.
* The maximum number of words the JP-S can manage is 64 words.
These settings are performed with the PC software JP-S Designer.

Start JP-S Designer.
Select [Fieldbus] in the tree view (see the above) of the main menu.
Set [Fieldbus type] as [DeviceNet].
Set [Node addresses], [Baud rate], [No. of output words] and [No. of input words] .
From the [Press] tab, click [Send Data] to send the set data to the controller. Note that the other data
such as set parameters and program will be also sent. Power cycle the unit to enable the settings.
Refer to “5. JP-S Designer” in the operation manual PC Operation for how to use JP-S Designer.
NOTE
Wait 30 seconds or more before turning the controller power back ON.
The DeviceNet is assigned to the I/O memory addresses shown in the table below.
Address
No. of Words Relay Register Function
number Number
Input Max 1000 – Domain that corresponds to the DeviceNet input
100 – 17D
126 Words* 17DF (external PLC writes, press reads).
Output Max 1800 – Domain that corresponds to the DeviceNet output (press
180 – 1FD
126 Words* 1FDF writes, external PLC reads).
By assigning the functions of special relays/special registers to these addresses, operation start and
status reading can be performed from the external PLC.
In DeviceNet, two-word (32 bit) data is assigned on two consecutive registers.
For example, if the current position (monitor output function) is assigned on registers 180H and
181H (fieldbus output area), the following output date is received.
Current position: 100 mm

Register 180H 86A0H
100.000 → 186A0H (100000)
Register 181H 0001H Assigned shown to the left
Numerical data is assigned in order of upper and lower levels.

6.3 PROFIBUS
 PROFIBUS Connector Diagram
5 1
9 6
 PROFIBUS Pin Assignment

1 NC Not connected
2 NC Not connected
3 B Line RS485 RxD/TxD (+)
4 RTS Send Request
5 GND Bus Bus Ground
6 5V Bus Output 5V Bus Power Output
7 NC Not connected
8 A Line RS485 RxD/TxD (-)
9 NC Not connected
Housing Cable Shield Shield Ground
NOTE
When setting a PROFIBUS unit, you need to make settings according to the specified format
otherwise you cannot establish a connection. Enter the data in order of Output-Input for the
connection data range settings and assign the data in one word units.

unit breakdown.

 GSD File
The GSD file is a text file including device features and composition options. If required, download the
GSD file to the master unit.
To use the GSD File, use the GSD file in the Operation Manual CD or download the latest
GSD file from the HMS homepage, the manufacturer of Anybus Compact Com.
Name File Name

PROFIBUS Setting File HMSB1811_JM140808.gsd

The LEDs show the following status.
Data exchange PROFIBUS module front LED

Condition
Y/N OP ST
Enable Normal Lit (green) Lit (green)
Disable Node addresses do not match Off Lit (green)
Disable Master/slave address overlap Off Lit (green)
No of input/output words do not
Disable Lit (red) Lit (green)
match
 PROFIBUS Setting
Item Range/Option Function
Type of fieldbus connecting the main unit and external
Type of fieldbus PROFIBUS
device
Node addresses can be selected between 0 and 125.
Node addresses 0 – 125 Slave Node addresses are differentiated. Set slaves to
free Node addresses.
Word number output is the amount of data output (press
writes (sends), external PLC reads (receives)). Set the
0 – 64 in total
necessary amount of data in words (1 word is 2 bytes).
No. of output words for input and
For PROFIBUS, you can set a maximum up to 64 words.
output
As the amount of data increases, so does the amount of
time to transfer data, decreasing the responsiveness.
Word number input is the amount of data input (external
PLC writes (sends), press reads (receives)). Set the
0 – 64 in total
necessary amount of data in words (1 word is 2 bytes).
No. of input words for input and
For PROFIBUS, you can set up to 64 words. As the
output
amount of data increases, so does the amount of time to
transfer data, decreasing the responsiveness.
Confirm the communication and connection status of the Fieldbus by making sure the status LED on
the PROFIBUS module is normal and also that it is communicating with the PROFIBUS master (PLC).


Select [Fieldbus] in the tree view (see the above) of the main menu. Set [Fieldbus type] as
[PROFIBUS].
Set [Node Addresses], [No. of output words] and [No. of input words].
NOTE
The PROFIBUS is assigned to the I/O memory addresses shown in the table below.
Address
number Number
Input Max 1000 – 100 – 13F Domain that corresponds to the PROFIBUS input
64 Words 13FF (external PLC writes, press reads).
Output Max 1800 - 180 – 1BF Domain that corresponds to the PROFIBUS output
64Words 1BFF (press writes, external PLC reads).
In PROFIBUS, two-word (32 bit) data is assigned on two consecutive registers.

For example, if the current position (monitor output function) is assigned on registers 180H and
181H (fieldbus output area), the following output date is received.
Current position: 100 mm

Register 180H 86A0H
100.000 → 186A0H (100000)
6.4 CC-Link
 CC-Link Connector Diagram
1 5
 CC-Link Pin Assignment

1 DA RS485 RxD/TxD(+)
2 DB RS485 RxD/TxD(-)
3 DG Signal Ground
4 SLD Shield Ground
5 FG Frame Ground
NOTE
• The CC-Link is a remote device station.
• Do not use the final number of output word area which is occupied by the system.
• When connecting a CC-Link, an upper controller (Master unit) should be ready for use.

unit breakdown.

 CSP File
CSP File is a text file including device features and composition option. If required, download the CPS
File to the master unit.
To use the CPS File, use the CPS File in the operation manual CD-ROM or download the latest CPS
File from the internet cite of HMS, the manufacturer of Anybus Compact Com.
Name File Name

PROFIBUS Setting File (for 1 channel) HMS-ABCC_CCL_1_JM110705.csp
Performance of the CSP File in the instruction CD-ROM has not been confirmed. Note that
performance is not guaranteed.
Each CSP File for number of channels (1-4) is available.
Example
To set number of channel as 4
Slave (JP-S) side/set number of channel = 4
Match number of channel
CPS File to be downloaded to the master unit: HMS-ABCC_CCL_4_JM110705.cspp

The LEDs show the following status.
Configuration setting
(Correspondence between CC-Link module front LED
master/slave setting)
Data exchange No. of Node Extended cyclic
RUN ERR
Y/N addresses setting
Enable Match Match Lit Off
Disable Match Not match Lit Off
Disable Not match Match Off Off
Disable Not match Not match Off Off

 CC-Link Setting
Type of fieldbus connecting the main
Type of fieldbus CC-Link
unit and external device
Node addresses can be selected
between 1 and 64.
Remote Node addresses of CC-Link
Node addresses 1 – 64
are differentiated for Node addresses
number. Set plural remote Node
addresses to free Node addresses.
If Baud rate is increased, maximum
156kbps transmission distance will be shortened.
625kbps • 156kbps 1200m
Baudrate 2.5Mbps • 625kbps 900m
5Mbps • 2.5Mbps 400m
10Mbps • 5Mbps 160m
• 10Mbps 100m
Ver1 Applicable to Ver 1 and Ver 2 of
CC-Link Ver number
Ver2 CC-Link
No. of Node addresses 1 –
Extended cyclic setting 1
Number of input words and number of
Number of Node output words are fixed according to
addresses (Number number of Node addresses and
of input/output) extended cyclic setting as per the
Extended cyclic setting 2 (Ver 2)
following table.

 Number of Node addresses (Input/Output assignment)
According to the combination of number of Node addresses and extended cyclic setting, you can
select from eight items below.
• Number of Node addresses 1 – Extended cyclic setting 1

I/O memory address for the Press
Point
Register number Relay number
Input data 4 100 – 103 ―
Input I/O 16 ― 1400 – 140F
Output data 3 180 – 182 ―
Output I/O 16 ― 1C00 – 1C0F

Point
Input data 8 100 – 107 ―
Input I/O 32 ― 1400 – 141F

Point
Input data 12 100 – 10B ―
Input I/O 48 ― 1400 – 142F
Output data 11 180 – 18B ―

Point
Input data 16 100 – 10F ―
Input I/O 64 ― 1400 – 143F
Output data 15 180 – 18E ―

Point
Input data 8 100 – 107 ―
Input I/O 16 ― 1400 – 140F

Point
Input I/O 48 ― 1400 – 142F

Point
Input I/O 32 ― 1400 – 141F

Point
Input I/O 64 ― 1400 – 143F
NOTE
• The number of output data is one less than the number of input data.
Output Data Input Data
Initial output+0 Initial input +0

Initial output+1 Data update area Initial input +1
(Write area) Data update area
… …
(Read area)
Initial output +z-2 Initial output +z-2
Initial output +z-1 System area Initial output +z-1
NOTE
• “Z” indicates the maximum number of words in the word area (Output/input).
• The system area cannot be used.

• The number of input words is the amount of input data (external PLC writes (sends), press reads
(receives)).
• The number of output words is the amount of output data (press writes (sends), PLC reads
(receives)).
• Set the number of words for the required data amount (1 word is 2 bytes).
Upper controller Electro Press

Master channel Slave channel
Output 001 Register100 Input area

Output 002 Register101
Output area
Output 001 Register180 Output area
Input area
Output 004 System Area Register183

Set [Fieldbus type] as [CC-Link].
Set [Node addresses], [Baud rate], [CC-Link Ver No.], [Occupied Node Numbers (I/O Numbers)].
NOTE
In CC-Link, two-word (32 bit) data is assigned on two consecutive registers.
For example, if the current position (monitor output function) is assigned on registers 180H and 181H
(fieldbus output area), the following output date is received.
Register 180H 86A0H Current position: 100 mm

100.000  186A0H (100000)

6.5 CC-Link (J)
This is not a standard CC-Link Fieldbus. I/O is excluded so you can set more input/output data points.
 CC-Link(J) Connector Diagram
1 5
 CC-Link(J) Pin Assignment

1 DA RS485 RxD/TxD (+)
2 DB RS485 RxD/TxD (-)
3 DG Signal Ground
4 SLD Shield Ground
5 FG Frame Ground
NOTE
• CC-Link remote input/output function cannot be used.
• The CC-Link(J) is a remote device station.
• Do not use the final number of output word area which is occupied by the system.
• When connecting a CC-Link(J), an upper controller (Master unit) should be ready for use.

unit breakdown.

 CSP File
Refer to “6.4 CC-Link.”
 CC-Link(J) Setting
Type of Fieldbus connecting the main unit and
Type of Fieldbus CC-Link(J)
external device
Node addresses can be selected between 1 and 64.
Remote Node addresses of CC-Link are
Node addresses 1 - 64
differentiated for Node addresses number. Set plural
remote Node addresses to free Node addresses.
If Baud rate is increased, maximum transmission
156kbps distance will be shortened.
625kbps 156kbps 1200m
Baud rate 2.5Mbps 625kbps 900m
5Mbps 2.5Mbps 400m
10Mbps 5Mbps 160m
10Mbps 100m
Ver1
CC-Link Ver number Applicable to Ver 1 and Ver 2 of CC-Link
Ver2
Number of Node
1–4
addresses Number of input words and number of output words
1, 2, 4, 8 (Ver 2) are fixed according to number of Node addresses
Extended cyclic
Fixed as 1 (Ver 1) and extended cyclic setting as per the following table.
Settings
 Number of input words, number of output words

Number of Extended cyclic setting
Node
1 2 4 8
addresses
1 4 8 16 32
2 8 16 32 64
3 12 24 48 96*
4 16 32 64 127*
NOTE
• The number of output words is one less than the number of input words
Output Area Input Area

Initial output+0 Initial input +0
Initial output+1 Data update area Initial input +1
Data update area
… (Write area) …
(Read area)
Initial output +z-2 Initial output +z-2
Initial output +z-1 System area Initial output +z-1
NOTE
• “Z” indicates the maximum number of words in the word area (Output/input).
• The system area cannot be used.

• The number of input words is the amount of input data (external PLC writes (sends), press reads
(receives)).
• The number of output words is the amount of output data (press writes (sends), PLC reads
(receives)).
• Set the number of words for the required data amount (1 word is 2 bytes).
 Example
Kind of channel: version 2 remote device channel
Number of channel: 1
Extended cyclic: 1
Number of input/output word: 4 (Number of effective input/output word is 3)
Upper controller Electro Press

Master Slave channel
Output 001 Register100 Input area

Output area
Output 001 Register180 Output area
Input area
Output 004 System Area Register183

Set [Fieldbus type] as [CC-Link(J)].
Set [Node addresses], [Baud rate], [CC-Link Ver No.], [Occupied Node Numbers] and [Extended
Cyclic Setting].
NOTE
The CC-Link(J) is assigned to the I/O memory addresses shown in the table below.
Address
number Number
Input Max 127 1000 – 100 – 17E Domain that corresponds to the CC-Link(J) input
Words* 17EF (external PLC writes, press reads).
Output Max 1800 – 180 – 1FE Domain that corresponds to the CC-Link(J) output
127 Words* 1FEF (press writes, external PLC reads).
In CC-Link(J), two-word (32 bit) data is assigned on two consecutive registers.
(CC-Link(J) output area), the following output date is received.

100.000 → 186A0H (100000)

6.6 CANopen
 CANopen Connector Diagram
RUN ERR
 CANopen Pin Assignment

1 Power Supply Ground
Communication Data Low
2 CAN_L
(CAN Bus Line L)
3 CAN_GND Ground
4
5 CAN_SHLD
6
Communication Data High
7 CAH_H
(CAN Bus Line H)
8
9
NOTE
• With CANopen specifications, we recommend attaching a 120Ω% 1/4W terminator at both ends of
the network.
• Always have the higher order controller (master unit) in a useable state before connecting
CANopen.

unit breakdown.

 The 2 LEDs
There are two status LEDs (RUN, ERR) on the module.
RUN
Status Description
OFF No power supply connected
Green Online, communication connection complete
Green, slow flash Offline, communication unconnected
Green, 1 flash STOPPED
Green, fast flash Auto Baud rate
Red Error
ERR
Status Content
OFF There is no power supplied, or the bus is functioning properly
Red, 1 flash Warning
Red, fast flash LSS
Red, 2 flashes Error
Red Bus Off
LSS: Layer Setting Service
 EDS File
The EDS file is a text file which includes the device’s characteristics and configuration options. (As
necessary use and download the EDS file to the master unit.)
The EDS files are included on the Operation Manual CD.
Assign the EDS file depending on the input-output domain for CANopen.
EDS files Application

EDS_ABCC_COP_JANOME_OUT16_IN16.eds Fieldbus Input: 256 bit (16Word)
Fieldbus Output: 256 bit (16Word)

 CANopen Settings
Setting
Setting Items Function
Range/Selections
Type of Fieldbus connecting the main unit and external
Type of Fieldbus CANopen
device.
The Node addresses can be set between 1 – 127.
Node addresses 1 – 127, LSS
LSS: Layer Setting Service
10k – 1Mbps The Baud rate can be selected and set from
Baud rate
Auto, LSS 10k/20k/50k/100k/125k/250k/500k/800k/1M/Auto/LSS.
LSS: You can only use the Layer Setting Service with a 1-to-1 connection. When using this, the node
addresses and baud rate are determined by the higher order controller of the connection.
 CANopen Assignment
You need to assign the relays or registers you want to use from the Fieldbus domain in the
Input-Output memory of the JP-S controller. Use the correct EDS file according to the CANopen
environment.
Also, set the CANopen assignment according to the configuration tool for your master device (PLC).

The diagram below shows an example of using the EDS file.
(EDS_ABCC_COP_JANOME_OUT16_IN16.eds).
By reading the EDS file supplied by us on the press, the relays and registers named on CANopen are
displayed on the configuration tool.
For example, if you want to use relay numbers 1000, 1002 and register numbers 180, 181, you need to
assign the following relays / registers using the configuration tool.
Reg100/Relay1000_F
Reg180/Relay1800_F
Reg181/Relay1810_F
You can make assignments in 16 bit (1 WORD) units.
Relay / Register which you can

< Fieldbus Input：2048 bit (128WORD) > use with CANopen
Relay Register CANopen Input:256bit(16WORD)
Name on CANopen
Number Number
1000 – 100F 100 Reg100/Relay1000_F
1010 – 101F 101 Reg101/Relay1010_F
Select and assign
16 registers.
17F0 – 17FF 17F Reg17F/Relay17F0_F
<Fieldbus Output：2048 bit (128WORD) >

Relay Register CANopen Output:256bit(16WORD)
Name on CANopen
Number Number
1800 – 180F 180 Reg180/Relay1800_F
1810 – 181F 181 Reg181/Relay1810_F
Select and assign
16 registers.
1FF0 – 1FFF 1FF Reg1FF/Relay1FF0_F
You can control the press with CANopen by assigning the necessary signals to Special Relays or
Registers.
(Assignment Examples)
Relay(1000): Mechanical Initialization
Relay(1002): Start program
Register(180,181): Current Position

These settings are made using the PC software JP-S Designer.
Start up JP-S Designer to make the settings.

Select [Fieldbus] from the tree view on the main screen (the left side of the diagram above).
The settable items are displayed on the right side of the screen. Set [Fieldbus type] as [CANopen].
From here the necessary parameters for using CANopen are displayed. Set these parameters. For
node addresses, you can enter a value under “Numerical Input”, or select LSS (Layer Setting Service).
Transfer the registered data to the controller by click [Send Data] from the [Press] tab. By doing so,
various settings and programs etc. are also transferred together with the fieldbus settings. Also, after
transferring the data, turn the power to the JP-S OFF and then ON again. By turning the power OFF
and then ON, the settings are enabled.
For information regarding general use of JP-S Designer, refer to “5. JP-S Designer” in the operation
manual PC Operation.
By assigning the special relay/special register functions to these addresses, you can make run starts
and status readouts from an external PLC.
Refer to “4.2 Special Relay/Special Register” for information regarding function assignment.
NOTE

6.7 PROFINET
 PROFINET Connector Diagram
# Name
1 Network Status (NS) (LED)
2 Module Status (MS) (LED)
3 Link/Activity (Port 1) (LED)
 PROFINET Pin Assignment
# Name Function
1 TD+
2 TD-
3 RD+
Connected to chassis ground
4, 5, 7, 8
over serial RC circuit
6 RD-
Housing Cable Shield

unit breakdown.

Network Module
Status LED Link/Activity LEDs Status LED
 Network Status LED

Status Details
OFF Offline
Green Online (RUN)
Green, flashing Online (STOP)
 Module Status
Status Details
OFF Offline
Green Normal operation
Green, 1 flash Diagnostic event(s)
Green, flashing (1Hz) DCP flash
Red Exception error
Red, 1 flash Configuration error
Red, 2 flashes IP address error
Red, 3 flashes Station name error
Red, 4 flashes Internal error
 Link/Activity
Status Details
OFF No link
Green Link (no communication)
Green, flashing Activity (communication present)

 GSD File
A GSD file is a text file that includes the device characteristics and configuration options. The GSD files
are included on the Operation Manual CD. Use the GSD files according to the PROFINET input and
output range.
GSD File Application

GSDML-2.3V-JANOME-JPS-RW8-20151026.xml 128 Inputs (8 words)
128 Outputs (8 words)
 PROFINET Settings
Setting Setting Range/Selection Function
Fieldbus type used to connect the main unit and
Fieldbus Type PROFINET
the external device.
The number of input/output words. Set according
to the master device to which you are installing
No. of Input/Output the GSD file. For example, if the number of
8/16/32/64/127*
Words input/output words is set 8, install the following
GSD file to the master device:
GSDML-2.3V-JANOME-JPS-RW8-20151026.xml
DAP2 Compatibility Supported/Not Supported Set according to the master device specifications.
Confirm the communication and connection status of the PROFINET module by making sure the
status LEDs indicate the module is operating normally.

These settings can be made using the PC software JP-S Designer.
Start up JP-S Designer.

Select [Field Bus] from the tree view on the main screen (as shown on the left of the diagram above).
The settable items for the Fieldbus are displayed on the right. Set [Type of Fieldbus] as [PROFINET] to
display and set the parameters ([I/O Word Number], [DAP2 Compatibility]) needed for operating the
PROFINET module.
Send these settings to the controller by using [Send Data] on the [Press] tab. Note that program data
and various settings are also sent together with Fieldbus settings.
Power cycle the JP-S controller after the settings are transferred to enable them*.
For details regarding general use of JP-S Designer, refer to “5. JP-S Designer” in the operation manual
PC Operation.
* Wait 30 seconds or more before turning the controller power back ON.
PROFINET communication is made using the I/O memory addresses shown in the table below.
Address
Word Count Relay Register Function
Number Number
Input Max 1000 – 100 – 17D Domain that corresponds to the PROFINET input
Output Max 1800 - 180 – 1FD Domain that corresponds to the PROFINET output
126 Words* 1FDF (press writes, external PLC reads).
* The maximum number of words the press can control is 64 words.
By assigning the functions of special relays/special registers to these addresses, you can start runs
and read out the press status from an external PLC. For details regarding assignment functions, refer
to “4.2 Special Relay/Special Register.”

If using PROFINET to process two word, 32 bit width data, the data is assigned to two consecutive
registers.
For example, if the current position (monitor output function) is assigned to register numbers 180H and
181H (Fieldbus output area), the data is output as follows:
If the current position is 100 mm, the data is assigned

Register 180H 86A0H
from the lower register number as shown below:
Register 181H 0001H 100.000  186A0H (100000)
Numerical data is assigned in order of lower word to upper word.
6.8 EtherNet/IP
 EtherNet/IP Connector Diagram
# Name
1 Network Status (NS) (LED)
2 Module Status (MS) (LED)
 EtherNet/IP Pin Assignment
# Name Function
1 TD+
2 TD-
3 RD+
Connected to chassis ground
4, 5, 7, 8
over serial RC circuit
6 RD-
Housing Cable Shield

unit breakdown.

Network Module
Status LED Link/Activity LEDs Status LED
 Network Status LED

Status Details
OFF No power
Green Connection established
Green, flashing Connection not established
Red IP address error
Red, flashing Connection timeout
 Module Status
Status Details
OFF No power
Green Run State
Green, flashing Idle State
Red Exception error
Red, flashing Configuration error
 Link/Activity
Status Details
OFF No link
Green Link (no communication) 100Mbit/s
Green, flashing Communicating 100Mbits/s
Yellow Link (no communication) 10Mbit/s
Yellow, flashing Communicating 10Mbit/s

 EDS File
The EDS file is a text file that includes the device characteristics and configuration options. The EDS
file is included in the Operation Manual CD.
EDS File Application

005A0000002E0100_JM20160210.eds EDS file for EtherNet/IP
 EtherNet/IP Settings
Setting Setting Range/Selection Function
Fieldbus type used to connect the main unit and the
Fieldbus Type EtherNet/IP
external device.
Set the IP address assigned for the EtherNet/IP
IP Address -
device
Set the subnet mask assigned for the EtherNet/IP
Subnet Mask -
device
Set the default gateway assigned for the
Default Gateway -
EtherNet/IP device
This is the data amount for output (press writes
Output Word No. 0 – 128*
(sends) and the PLC reads (receives)).
This is the data amount for input (press reads
Input Word No. 0 – 128*
(receives) and the PLC writes (sends)).
Confirm the communication and connection status of the EtherNet/IP module by making sure the
status LEDs indicate the module is operating normally.

These settings can be made using the PC software JP-S Designer.
Start up JP-S Designer.

Select [Field Bus] from the tree view on the main screen (as shown on the left of the diagram above).
The settable items for the Fieldbus are displayed on the right. Set [Type of Fieldbus] to [EtherNet/IP] to
display and set the parameters ([IP Address], [Subnet-Mask], [Default-Gateway], [Output number of
words], and [Input number of words]) needed for operating the EtherNet/IP module.
Send these settings to the controller by using [Send Data] on the [Press] tab. Note that program data
and various settings are also sent together with Fieldbus settings.
Power cycle the JP-S controller after the settings are transferred to enable them*.
For details regarding general use of JP-S Designer, refer to “5. JP-S Designer” in the operation manual
PC Operation.
* Wait 30 seconds or more before turning the controller power back ON.

EtherNet/IP communication is made using the I/O memory addresses shown in the table below.
Address
Word Count Relay Register Function
Number Number
Input Max 1000 – 100 – 17D Domain that corresponds to the EtherNet/IP input
Output Max 1800 - 180 – 1FD Domain that corresponds to the EtherNet/IP output
126 Words* 1FDF (press writes, external PLC reads).
* The maximum number of words the press can control is 64 words.
By assigning the functions of special relays/special registers to these addresses, you can start runs
and read out the press status from an external PLC. For details regarding assignment functions, refer
to “4.2 Special Relay/Special Register.”
If using PROFINET to process two word, 32 bit width data, the data is assigned to two consecutive
registers.
For example, if the current position (monitor output function) is assigned to register numbers 180H and
181H (Fieldbus output area), the data is output as follows:
If the current position is 100 mm, the data is assigned

Register 180H 86A0H
from the lower register number as shown below:
Register 181H 0001H 100.000  186A0H (100000)
Numerical data is assigned in order of lower word to upper word.

7. ETHERNET
7.1 Ethernet Overview

The controller is equipped with Ethernet (10/100BASE-TX) as
standard.
The Ethernet connector is on the front of the controller.
The following functions can be used by transmitting and receiving Ethernet

commands and data from a PC or external devices via Ethernet. Connector
1. Access to relays/registers
2. Sending results data
3. Sending and receiving setting data
4. Rewriting of system programs
The function in 1 accesses relays/registers via the Ethernet to control the press, and the same function
and uses as the Digital Input/Output (DIO) can be performed. This function is called “Ethernet I/O”.
Functions 2 to 4 require connection to a PC, and use the PC software JP-S SaS System.
Electro Press does not stop immediately after an emergency stop

Caution command executed when not using DIO network.

Ethernet hub enables you to establish a link between PC and several presses via Ethernet.
Connection Example
Hub
PC
Press 1 Press 2 Press 3
7.2 Ethernet Connector

 Ethernet Connector (ENET) Diagram RJ-45
8 1
 Ethernet Connector (ENET) Pin Assignment

1 TD+ Send signal +
2 TD- Send signal -
3 RD+ Receive signal +
4 NC Not connected
5 NC Not connected
6 RD- Receive signal -
7 NC Not connected
8 NC Not connected

7.3 Communication Settings (IP Address Settings)
The JP-S Ethernet communication uses TCP/IP Protocol. For this reason, an IP address, subnet mask,
and default gateway need to be configured on the JP-S to enable Ethernet communication.
These configurations are performed using the PC software JP-S Designer. JP-S Designer is bundled
in the Operating Manual CD. For details on how to use this software, see the “PC Operation” operating
manual.
IP address assignment can be made by PC via Ethernet or RC232C.
In order to assign IP address via Ethernet, the communication settings (TCP/IP Settings) on the PC
need to have been set. Take note of the following points on PC communication settings (TCP/IP).
• In order to use the Ethernet function, a TCP/IP network environment is required.
• If a network currently exists, there is no need to configure the PC with a new IP address.
• As fixed IP addresses are used, do not use a DHCP server etc.
• To assign a new IP address to your PC, consult the network administrator.
 Assigning the JP-S IP Address

Start JP-S Designer. From the [Press] tab, click [IP Address Setting Press] and select [Ethernet] or
[RS-232C].
Set the following 3 items.
• [IP Address]
• [Subnet Mask]
• [Default Gateway]
When the “Set” button is pressed, the IP address and other settings are assigned to the specified
press.
The IP address settings dialog is initially configured to perform settings for the press of the IP address
“192.168.200.180”, which is the default address of JP-S.
After having set the IP Address, press [Change] to change the IP Address, selecting the Electro Press.
If setting IP address, cannot set 0 and 255 in the right side (the fourth octet).
The new IP address and other details are reflected after the press is restarted.
NOTE
The following values are set as default for the press IP address.
• IP Address: 192.168.200.180
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
• Default gateway: 0.0.0.0

7.4 Communication Specifications
This chapter explains the required communication specifications for performing controls and receiving
results data from an external device via the Ethernet.
Note: If you are using the PC software JP-S SaS System to send setting data or receive results data,
there is no need to understand the contents of this chapter. The explanations here are only
required if you have created your own PC software, or are communicating from the PLC.
• Basic Communication Protocol

TCP/IP (IPv4)
• Upper Level Communication Protocol
Data Communication Protocol (described in each section of this manual)
The Electro Press (JP-S) operates as a server
Board number
Port number Function

10028 Receiving results data
10029 Ethernet I/O (Control via access to Relay/Register)
• Means of Opening Connection

Connection is opened from client side
• Data Display Method
Binary Code
• Timeout: 10 sec
• Retry: None
In general, the byte order of multi-byte data transfer is big-endian.

However, the byte order of Position Data and Load Data (2 Words, (4 bytes, 32 bits)) is an exception.
In case of “Receiving Result Data”, the byte order of Position Data and Load Data is big-endian.
In case of “Ethernet I/O”, the byte order of Position Data and Load Data is little-endian.
Accordingly, the order is reversed.

With “Ethernet I/O”, the “position data” and “load data” assigned to the register is read/written, however,
because the register arrangement is lower order words to higher order words, when this is reversed,
the sequence is opposite to that of “Result Data Acquisition”. Take caution.
Example: Position 86.240 mm 86240 = 000150E0H

Upper level: 0001H
Lower level: 50E0H

In Result Data Acquisition, is transferred in order of upper and lower levels.
N HEX Details
1 00 Upper level
2 01 0001H
3 50 Lower level
4 E0 50E0H
In Ethernet (read from register), registers are configured in order of lower and upper levels; and data is
transferred in the same order.
N HEX Details
1 50 Lower level
2 E0 50E0H
3 00 Upper level
4 01 0001H
7.5 Ethernet I/O (Control via Access to Relay/Register)

Relay/registers (I/O memory) can be accessed via the Ethernet to control JP-S. This function is called
“Ethernet I/O”.
As Ethernet I/O, an area of 128 word number (1 word = 2 bytes) is secured each for input (external
device writes, press reads) and (press writes, external device reads).
In order to use the Ethernet I/O, firstly the following special relay/special register functions should be
assigned to Ethernet I/O address. The I/O memory addresses that can be used in Ethernet I/O are as
shown below.
Address
number Number
128 Word 2000 – Domain that corresponds to the Ethernet input (external
200 – 27F
Number* 27FF device writes, press reads).
128 Word 2800 – Domain that corresponds to the Ethernet output (press
280 – 2FF
Number* 2FFF writes, external device reads).
Data in the input area (2000H~27FFH) can be read from external device.
These settings are performed with the PC software JP-S Designer. For details on the setting procedure,
see the operation manual PC Operation.

• Port Number
Port number for Ethernet I/O (Control via access to Relay/Register)
Port Number Function

10029 Ethernet I/O (Control via access to Relay/Register)
Electro Press (JP-S) acts as server.

In order to start communication, it is required to establish connection of board number 10029 for JP-S
IP Address. Establish connection from external device (PLC, PC, etc.) as client.
In case connection cannot be established, check cable (cross cable for direct connection, straight
cable via hub), IP Address of external device, subnet mask, default gateway and port number (10029).
IP Address: 192.168.200.180
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway: 0.0.0.0
7.5.1 Format for Sending & Receiving Data

Data formats used for communication through the Ethernet are shown in the diagram below.
The data has a communication byte number (2 bytes) and function code (2 bytes) at the head, and if
required has variable length data following the head.
Communication Function Code Data (Variable length, multiple bytes of 2)

byte(s) number (N) 2 bytes
2 bytes
No. of send bytes

MAX: 1024 bytes
Enter the total number of send text bytes in “No. of Send Bytes” (including communication byte number
itself). A maximum of 1024 bytes can be sent.
The function code is a code that displays this text function.
 Arrangement Method of Multibyte Data

Data of 2 or more bytes is arranged in order of upper and lower levels (big-endian).
For example, Acknowledge ACK (function code 0600H) does not have data, and the communication
byte number is 4 bytes. The actual communication text that is sent and received is as shown below.

 Communication text data example: Acknowledge
Communication
Function Code
byte number
00 04 06 00
Communication byte numbers and function codes are configured in order of upper and lower levels
(big endian).
In Ethernet I/O, two-word (4 bytes, 32 bit) data is output in order of lower and upper levels.
(Ethernet output area), the following output date is received.

100.000 → 186A0H (100000)
7.5.2 Data Send Procedure

 Relay/Register Read
Client Press
Client sends “I/O Relay Read” command to the
I/O Relay press.
Read
Normal Press receives the command, and sends a signal
0100H response
that has the I/O relay data as a block.
0100H
I/O data If the same client sends an “I/O Data Read”

Read Normal
response command to the press, the press receives the
0101H
0101H command and sends the I/O register data as data
that has a block.

 Relay/Register Write
Client Press
I/O Relay Client sends the “I/O Relay Write” command (with
Write Normal the details to be written to the data block) to the
0102H
response press. The press writes the received I/O relay data,
0102H
and returns a normal response.
I/O data The client sends the “I/O Relay Write” command
Write Normal (with the details to be written to the data block) to the
0103H response
0103H press. The press writes the received I/O relay data,
and returns a normal response.
7.5.3 Function Code

Function
Function Name Function
Code
Reads the I/O relay state (ON/OFF) (Maximum 128 point
I/O relay read 0100H
continuous)
I/O register read 0101H I/O register value read (Maximum 64 points continuous)
Value (ON/OFF) is written to I/O relay (Maximum 128 point
I/O Relay write 0102H
continuous)
I/O register write 0103H Value is written to I/O register (Maximum 64 point continuous)
Function
Code
I/O relay read Process was not performed correctly for the I/O relay read
8100H
abnormal response command
I/O register read Process was not performed correctly for the I/O register read
8101H
I/O Relay write Process was not performed correctly for the I/O relay write
8102H
I/O register write Process was not performed correctly for the I/O register write
8103H

Function
Code
Specify the item (item number) of the program data to write. The
data is written to the execution domain. This is applied to runs
Write Program
0204H hereafter; however, this data is erased once the power is turned
Data
OFF. For permanent data settings you need to write the data to
the flash ROM with the Save Setting Data 0300H function.
Read Program
0205H Specify the item (item number) of the program data to read.
Data
Specify the item (item number) of the step data to write. The data
is written to the execution domain. This is applied to runs
Write Step Data 0254H hereafter; however, this data is erased once the power is turned
OFF. For permanent data settings you need to write the data to a
Flash ROM with the Save Setting Data 0300H function.
Read Step Data 0255H Specify the item (item number) of the step data to read.
Specify the item (item number) of the step sensor data to write.
The data is written to the execution domain. This is applied to runs
Write Step
0264H hereafter; however, this data is erased once the power is turned
Sensor
OFF. For permanent data settings you need to write the data to a
Flash ROM with the Save Setting Data 0300H function.
Read Step
0265H Specify the item (item number) of the step sensor data to read.
Sensor
Save Setting
0300H The registered data is written to the flash ROM.
Data
Function
Name Function
Code
Program Data
8204H An error occurred while writing program data.
Write Error
Program Data
8205H An error occurred while reading program data.
Read Error
Step Data Write
8254H An error occurred while writing step data.
Error
Step Data Read
8255H An error occurred while reading step data.
Error
Step Sensor
8264H An error occurred while writing step data.
Write Error
Step Sensor
8265H An error occurred while reading step data.
Read Error
Setting Data
8300H An error occurred while saving setting data.
Save Error

7.5.4 I/O Relay Read
 Client  Press
I/O relay data as many as the “Read point” from the top I/O relay number is requested.
No. of
N Details
Bytes
1 2 No. of Communication Bytes (8)
3 2 Function Code (0100H)
5 2 Top I/O Relay Number: 2000H~2FFFH
7 2 Read point: 1~128 (m)
 Press  Client
I/O relay data as many as the “Read point” from the top I/O relay number is output.
No. of
N Details
Bytes
1 2 No. of Communication Bytes
5 2 Top I/O Relay Number : 2000H~2FFFH
7 2 I/O Relay Data 1 B0-B16(See below)
….
2 I/O Relay Data n B0-B16(See below)
 I/O Relay Data Bit device storage sequence

The read I/O relay status is stored in the sequence of lower level  upper level. Also, if the number of
read points is not a multiple of 16, the left over bits are 0.
Top I/O relay number
0: OFF
1: ON
B1 B1 B13 B1 B1 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
Data 1
・
・
・ B1 B1 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
Data n
Read Points: m, number of data: n

n = m/16 (roundup)

7.5.5 I/O Register Read (Read Numerical Type Data)
I/O register data as many as “Read register number” from the top I/O register number is requested.
No. of
N Details
Bytes
5 2 Top I/O Register Number: 200H~2FFH
7 2 Read register number: 1~64 (n)
I/O register data as many as “Read register number” from the top I/O register number is output.
No. of
N Details
Bytes
5 2 Top I/O Register Number: 200H - 2FFH
7 2 Register data 1
9 2 Register data 2
…
2 Register data n
7.5.6 I/O Relay Write

I/O relay data write as many as the “Read point” from the top I/O relay number is requested.
No. of
N Details
Bytes
5 2 Top I/O Relay Number : 2000H - 27FFH
7 2 Write point: 1 - 128
...
2 I/O Relay Data n B0-B16(See below)

write points is not a multiple of 16, the left over bits are 0. Top I/O relay number
0: OFF
1: ON

Data 1
・
・
・ B15 B14 B13 B12 B1 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
Data n
NOTE
• Always ensure that the specified write points match the data n number.
Write Points: m, number of data: n
n = m/16 (roundup)
For example, if there are 16 write points, set the data n number as 1 (word).
If write was performed according to the client request, the top I/O relay number and write points are
output.
N No. of Bytes Details

1 2 Byte(s)
3 2 Function code (0102H)
5 2 Top I/O relay number: 2000H – 27FFH
7 2 Write point: 1 – 128

7.5.7 I/O Register Write (Numerical data write)
I/O relay data write as many as the “Write register number” from the top I/O register number is
requested.

5 2 Top I/O Register Number : 200H - 27FH
7 2 Write register number: 1 - 64 (n)
9 2 Register data 1
11 2 Register data 2
…
2 Register data n
output. (echo back)

5 2 Top I/O Register Number : 200H-27FH
7 2 Write register number: 1 – 64 (n)

7.5.8 Work Serial Number Read (FC: 0501H)
This reads the work serial number from the press. The read out data includes the work serial number
(32 ASCII characters). If the work serial number is less than 32 characters, blank register(s) is filled
with 00H (Null).

5 - 20 32 Work serial number
Normal response
The press transmits the following data, if the work serial number is “Work01”.
00240501576F726B30310000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
Error
5 - 20 32 Error Code

7.5.9 Work Serial Number Write (FC: 0500H)
This writes the work serial number to the press. When writing the work serial number (1 – 32), fill the
blanks with 00H (Null) if it is less than 32 characters.

If you want use “Work01” as a work serial number, set the following characters.
00240500576F726B30310000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
Normal response
The press transmits the following data, if the work serial number is “Work01”.
00240500576F726B30310000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
Error
5 - 20 32 Error Code

7.5.10 Write Program Data
This overwrites various data of a program indicated by program number.
This is a request to write (overwrite) the various data of a program indicated by program number.
N Byte No. Details
1 2 No. of communication bytes
5 2 Program number
7 2 Not in use
9 2 Not in use
Item number
11 2
Refer to Program Data/Item Number List on the next page.
13 2 Write data (lower order word)
15 2 Write data (higher order word)
After writing data according to the client’s request, when correct, the press responds with the
program number and written data (echo back).
Normal Response
N Byte No. Details
5 2 Program number
7 2 0000H
9 2 0000H
11 2 Item number (echo back)
Error Response (responds with the function code 8204H)

N Byte no. Details
5 1 Error response code (01H function code error, 02H data error)

Program Data/Item Number List
Item Item No. Settable Range / Selection

Program home position 0 Model limits (position)
Approach Y/N 1 1: Yes 0: No
Approach speed 2 Model limits (speed)
Approach acceleration 3 1 – maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Approach deceleration 4 1 – maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Start Position 5 Model limits (position)
Maximum pressure (approach) 6 Model limits (load)
Probe Y/N 7 1: Yes 0: No
Probe speed 8 Model limits (speed)
Probe acceleration 9 1 – maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Probe deceleration 10 1 – maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Touching Load 11 Model limits (load)
Probe position limit 12 Model limits (position)
Return Y/N 13 1: Yes 0: No
Return speed 14 Model limits (speed)
Return acceleration 15 1 – maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Return deceleration 16 1 – maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
17 Register number
18 Bit width
19 Register number
Touching Load (OUT)
20 Bit width

7.5.11 Read Program Data
This reads the various data of a program indicated by program number.
This is a request to read the various data of a program indicated by program number.
N Byte No. Details
5 2 Program number
7 2 Not in use
9 2 Not in use
11 2 Item number (refer to the table below)
Item Number List

Program home position 0 Model limits (position)
Approach Y/N 1 1: Yes 0: No
Approach speed 2 Model limits (speed)
Approach acceleration 3 1 – maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Approach deceleration 4 1 – maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Start position 5 Model limits (position)
Maximum pressure (approach) 6 Model limits (load)
Probe Y/N 7 1: Yes 0: No
Probe speed 8 Model limits (speed)
Probe acceleration 9 1 – maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Probe deceleration 10 1 – maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
Touching Load 11 Model limits (load)
Probe position limit 12 Model limits (position)
Return Y/N 13 1: Yes 0: No
Return speed 14 Model limits (speed)
Return acceleration 15 1 – maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Return deceleration 16 1 – maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
17 Register number
18 Bit width
19 Register number
Touching Load (OUT)
20 Bit width

After reading the data according to the client’s request, when correct, the press responds with the
program number and read data (echo back).
Normal Response
N Byte No. Details
5 2 Program number
7 2 0000H
9 2 0000H
11 2 Item number
13 2 Read data (lower order word)
15 2 Read data (higher order word)
Error Response (responds with the function code 8205H)
N Byte no. Details

7.5.12 Write Step Data (0254H)
This overwrites the various data of a step indicated by program number and step number.
This is a request to write (overwrite) the various data of a step as indicated by program number and
step number.
N Byte No. Details
5 2 Program number
7 2 Step number
9 2 Not in use
Item number
The item number meaning varies depending on the pressing
11 2
type.
Refer to Item Number List on the next page.
If the data is written correctly, the specified data is echoed back.
N Byte No. Details
5 2 Program number
7 2 Step number
9 2 Not in use
11 2 Item number (request echo back)
Error Response (returns the function code 8254H)

N Byte no. Details

Step Data/Item Number List
Item numbers 0 – 3 have the same meaning for constant speed pressing.
1: Const Speed - Stop at the set pos.
2: Const Speed - Stop at the set dis.
Pressing type 0 3: Const Speed - Stop at the set load
4: Const Speed - Stop at the set inc. load
5: Const Speed - Stop on the event
Speed 1 Model limits (speed)
Acceleration 2 1 – maximum acceleration [mm/s2]
Deceleration 3 1 – maximum deceleration [mm/s2]
This information regarding constant speed pressing is omitted from here onwards.
 Constant Speed - Stop at set position data
Max. Pressure 4 Model limits (load)
End Position 5 Model limits (position)
Step End Mode 7 0: Normal, 1: Connect
 Constant Speed - Stop at set distance data

Max. Pressure 4 Model limits (load)
Pressing Distance 5 Model limits (distance)
Distance Start Value 8 0: End Pos. of Prev. Step, 1: Register Ref.
Reg. Number of Dis. Start 9 Register number
Value 10 Bit width
 Constant Speed - Stop at set load data

Position Limit 4 Model limits (position)
End Load 5 Model limits (load)
Deceleration Load Rate 6 0 – 100%
Stop Reference Position 7 Model limits (position)

 Constant Speed - Stop at set increment load data
End Load 5 Model limits (load)
Deceleration Load Rate 6 0 – 100%
Stop Reference Position 7 Model limits (position)
Load Value at Start 10 0: End load of previous step, 1: Register Ref.
Input Register Number of 11 Register number
Increment Load Value 12 Bit width
 Constant Speed - Stop on event data

Maximum Pressure 5 Model limits (load)
7 Relay number
Stop Event Relay
8 Relay Y/N 0:No, 1: Yes
 Constant Load - Stop after set load data

Pressing Type 0 6: Const Load - Stop after the set load
Maximum Speed 1 Model limits (speed)
Pressing Load 2 Model limits (load)
Pressing Time 3 0.0 – 999.9s
Number of Gain Table 4 1 – 16
 Constant Load - Stop at set position data

Pressing Type 0 7: Const Load - Stop at the set pos.
End Load 4 Model limits (position)

 Constant Load - Stop at the set distance data
Pressing Type 0 8: Const Load - Stop at the set dis.
Pressing Distance 4 Model limits (distance)
Distance Start Value 9 0: End Pos. of Prev. Step 1: Register Ref.
Distance Start Value Register 10 Register number
Number 11 Bit width
 Constant Load - Stop on the event data

Pressing Type 0 9: Const Load - Stop on the event
7 Relay number
Stop Event Relay
8 Relay Y/N 0:No, 1: Yes

7.5.13 Read Step Data (0255H)
This reads the various data of a step indicated by program number and step number.
This is a request to write (overwrite) the various data of a step as indicated by program number and
step number.
N Byte No. Details
5 2 Program number
7 2 Step number
9 2 Not in use
Item number
The item number meaning varies depending on the pressing
11 2
type.
Refer to the Step Data Write (0254H) Number List.
The specified data is read.
N Byte No. Details
5 2 Program number
7 2 Step number
9 2 Not in use

N Byte no. Details

7.5.14 Write Step Sensor Data (0264H)
This overwrites the various data of a step sensor indicated by program number, step number and step
sensor number.
This is a request to write (overwrite) the various data of a step sensor indicated by program number,
step number and step sensor number.
N Byte No. Details
5 2 Program number
7 2 Step number
9 2 Step sensor number
Item number
The item number meaning varies depending on the sensor
11 2
type.
Refer to Item Number List on the next page.
Successful response. If the data is written correctly, the specified data is echoed back.
N Byte No. Details
5 2 Program number
7 2 Step number
9 2 Step sensor number
Error response (returns the function code 8264H)

N Byte no. Details

Step Sensor Data, Item Number List
 Load Sensor - Given Position
Item
Item Settable Range / Selection
No.
Sensor Type 0 1: Load Sensor - Given Pos.
Action on Sensor Fault 1 0:None, 1:Program end, 2:End run on the spot
Sensor OK(OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Yes 0: No
Sensor Fault(OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Yes 0: No
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay Number 6
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) 7 1: Yes 0: No
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay Number 8
Sensor Fault of Lower (OUT) Relay Y/N 9 1: Yes 0: No
10 Register number
The Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
The Position (OUT)
13 Bit width
Start Position 14 Model limits (position)
End Position 15 Model limits (position)
Upper Lim. Load at Begin Pos. 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Lim. Load at Begin Pos. 17 Model limits (load)
Upper Lim. Load at End Pos. 18 Model limits (load)
Lower Lim. Load at End Pos. 19 Model limits (load)
 Load Sensor - Given Distance (start of step)

Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 2: Load Sensor - Given Distance
Sensor OK (OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Yes 0: No
Sensor Fault (OUT) Relay Y/N 5 1: Yes 0: No
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT) Relay Number 6
Sensor Fault of Upper(OUT) Relay Y/N 7 1: Yes 0: No
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT) Relay Number 8
Sensor Fault of Lower(OUT) Relay Y/N 9 1: Yes 0: No
10 Register number
The Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
The Distance (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sensor Begin Dis. 14 Model limits (distance)
Sensor End Dis. 15 Model limits (distance)
Upper Lim. Load at Begin Dis. 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Lim. Load at Begin Dis. 17 Model limits (load)
Upper Lim. Load at End Dis. 18 Model limits (load)
Lower Lim. Load at End Dis. 19 Model limits (load)
OK/Fault when Out of Sensor Area 20 0: OK, 1: NG

 Position Sensor (Start)
Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 3: Load Sensor (Start)
Sensor OK(OUT) Relay Y/N 3 1: Yes 0: No
Sensor Fault of Upper (OUT) Relay Y/N 7 1: Yes 0: No
10 Register number
The Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
The Position (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Pos. 14 Model limits (position)
Lower Limit Pos. 15 Model limits (position)
 Peak Load Sensor - Given Position

Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 4: Peak Load Sensor - Given Pos.
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Peak Pos (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Begin Pos. 14 Model limits (position)
Sampling End Pos. 15 Model limits (position)
Upper Lim. Load of Peak 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Lim. Load of Peak 17 Model limits (load)

 Peak Load Sensor - Given Distance
Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 5: Peak Load Sensor - Given Dis.
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Peak Dis (OUT)
13 Bit width
Sampling Begin Dis. 14 Model limits (distance)
Sampling End Dis. 15 Model limits (distance)
Upper Limit Load of Peak 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Limit Load of Peak 17 Model limits (load)
 Bottom Load Sensor - Given Position

Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 6: Bottom Load Sensor - Given Pos.
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Bottom Pos (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Load of Bottom 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Limit Load of Bottom 17 Model limits (load)

 Bottom Load Sensor - Given Distance
Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 7: Bottom Load Sensor - Given Dis.
10 Register number
Reg. Num of Bottom Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Bottom Dis (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Load of Bottom 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Limit Load of Bottom 17 Model limits (load)
 Top Load Sensor - Given Position

Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 8: Top Sensor - Given Pos.
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Top Pos (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Load of Top 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Limit Load of Top 17 Model limits (load)
OK/Fault on No Top 19 0: NG, 1: OK
Top Load Sensor Relay Y/N 21 1: Yes 0: No

 Top Load Sensor - Given Distance
Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 9: Top Sensor - Given Dis.
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Top Dis (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Load of Top 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Limit Load of Top 17 Model limits (load)
OK/Fault on No Top 19 0: NG, 1: OK
Top Load Sensor Relay Y/N 21 1: Yes 0: No
 Valley Load Sensor - Given Position

Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 10: Valley Load Sensor - Given Pos.
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Valley Pos (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Load of Valley 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Limit Load of Valley 17 Model limits (load)
OK/Fault on No Valley 19 0: NG, 1: OK
Valley Sensor Relay Y/N 21 1: Yes 0: No

 Valley Load Sensor - Given Distance
Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 11: Valley Load Sensor - Given Dis.
Sensor OK (OUT)Relay Y/N 3 1: Yes 0: No
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of Valley Dis (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Load of Valley 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Limit Load of Valley 17 Model limits (load)
OK/Fault on No Valley 19 0: NG, 1: OK
Valley Sensor Relay Y/N 21 1: Yes 0: No
 P-P Sensor - Given Position

Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 12: Peak to Peak Load Sensor - Given Pos.
10 Register number
Reg. Num of Peak Load(OUT)
11 Bit width

 P-P Sensor - Given Distance
Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 13: Peak to Peak Load Sensor - Given Dis.
10 Register number
Reg. Num of Peak Load(OUT)
11 Bit width
 Diff 1 Sensor - Given Position

Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 14: Differential 1 Sensor - Given Pos.
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
Reg. Num of DIF Pos (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Load of DIF 16 Model limits (load)
Lower Limit Load of DIF 17 Model limits (load)
Inclination Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/s
OK/Fault on No Differential 20 0: NG, 1: OK
Differential-1 Sensor (OUT) 21
Differential-1 Sensor Relay Y/N 22 1: Yes 0: No

 Diff 1 Sensor - Given Distance
Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 15: Differential 1 Sensor - Given Dis.
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
13 Bit width
Inclination Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/s
OK/Fault on No DIF 20 0: NG, 1: OK
DIF Sensor (OUT) 21
DIF Sensor Relay Y/N 22 1: Yes 0: No

 Diff 2 Sensor - Given Position
Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 16: Differential 2 Sensor - Given Pos.
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
13 Bit width
Inclination Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/mm
DIF Sensor (OUT) 21

 Diff 2 Sensor - Given Distance
Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 17: Differential 2 Sensor - Given Dis.
10 Register number
11 Bit width
12 Register number
13 Bit width
Inclination Value 18 -999999 – 999999 N/mm
DIF Sensor (OUT) 21
 Position Sensor (Step End)

Item
No.
Sensor Type 0 23: Position Sensor (End)
10 Register number
The Load (OUT)
11 Bit width
12 Register number
The Position (OUT)
13 Bit width
Upper Limit Position 14 Model limits (position)
Lower Limit Position 15 Model limits (position)

7.5.15 Save Setting Data (0300H)
This saves registered data to the flash ROM.
Data written with the write command (0254H, 0264H) is applied to run operations; however, if the
power is turned OFF, the data reverts to the previous values. If you want the written data to remain
even when the power is turned OFF, you need to send this command and save the data to the flash
ROM.
After the press receives this command, it immediately responds with a “correct” response and the save
operation is performed (the data is written to the flash ROM). The writing process may take some time.
30 seconds at the most. Once the writing operation is complete, a “save complete” response is
returned.
This is a request to save the setting data
N Byte No. Details
5 2 0000H
7 2 0000H
Once the request is received, the press immediately returns a correct response (echo back)
N Byte No. Details
5 2 0000H
7 2 0000H
After the save operation is complete, the press returns a correct response or an error response
below.
N Byte No. Details
5 2 0000H
7 2 0000H

N Byte No. Details

7.5.16 Error Response
If each command is not processed normally, an abnormal response command is output from the press.
N Byte No. Details

Function Code (8100H – 8103H)
3 2
(8204H, 8205, 8254H, 8255H, 864H, 865H, 8300H)
5 1 Error Response Code (see below)
 Abnormal Response Code List
Abnormal
Response Error Name Error Details Example Fix
Code
Function code Unsupported function code is Check the press support function
01H
error received by the press code, review the sent request text
Data error Request text data section Review the request text data
02H
details are abnormal section
 Example:
• Client  Press, Read 80 I/O relay numbers from 9800H
0008 0100 9800 0050
N HEX Details
2 08 8
3 01 Function Code
4 00 0100H
5 98 Top I/O Relay Number
6 00 9800H 9800H is not in Ethernet I/O area.
7 00 Read register number
8 50 80 points (80 = 0050H) 80 = 16 * 5 (5 words)
• Press  Client, Data abnormality (Top I/O Relay Number is out of the range)
0005 8100 02
N HEX Details
2 05 5
3 81 Function Code
4 00 8100H
5 02 Abnormal Response Code 02H: Data abnormality

7.5.17 Ethernet I/O (Examples)
An example of Ethernet I/O communication is shown below
Register numbers are assigned as follows.
Relay/Register
Bit Details
Number
2000 1 Ram free - IN
2001 1 Home position – IN
2003 1 Set program number - in IN
2004 1 Move program home position – IN
2005 1 Start program - IN
2010 1 External, Position drive - IN
2011 1 External, Distance drive - IN
2012 1 External, Load drive - IN
2030 1 JOG1 up (-)- IN
2031 1 JOG1 down (+) IN
2040 1 Alarm reset – IN
210 32 Program number – IN
212 32 External, Driving speed – IN
214 32 External, End position – IN
216 32 External, End distance – IN
218 32 External, End load – INN
2800 1 Ram drive power supply status – OUT
2801 1 Returning to home position OUT
2802 1 Finished returning to home position - OUT
2804 1 Moving program home position – OUT
2805 1 Program standby – OUT
2806 1 Executing program – OUT
2810 1 External, driving – OUT
2820 1 Executing step number strobe
2830 1 JOG driving – OUT
2840 1 In alarm – OUT
2860 1 Program number set acknowledge – OUT
288 32 Program number - OUT
2900 1 Monitor data strobe – OUT
292 32 Current position – OUT
294 32 Current load - OUT
296 32 Monitor data number – OUT
2A0 32 Alarm, error number 1 – OUT
2AA 32 Alarm, error number 6 – OUT
2AC 32 Alarm, error number 7 – OUT
2AE 32 Alarm, error number 8 – OUT
2B0 32 Calendar, year – OUT
2B2 32 Calendar, month/day – OUT
2B4 32 Calendar, hour/minute – OUT

 Status Read (I/O Relay Read Example)
The following table is an example to read the status of assignment of Ethernet I/O.
Each relay shows output status.
Relay Number Bit Details Status

2800 1 Ram drive power supply status – OUT ON
2801 1 Returning to home position OUT OFF
2802 1 Finished returning to home position - OUT ON
2804 1 Moving program home position – OUT OFF
2805 1 Program standby – OUT ON
2806 1 Executing program – OUT OFF
2810 1 External, driving – OUT OFF
2830 1 JOG driving – OUT OFF
2840 1 In alarm – OUT OFF
• Client  Press, Read 80 I/O register numbers from 2800H

0008 0100 2800 0050
N HEX Details
2 08 8
3 01 Function Code
4 00 0100H Read I/O register
5 28 Top I/O Register Number
6 00 2800H
8 50 80 points (80 = 0050H) 80 = 16 * 5 (5 words)
• Press  Client, Response 5-word data from 2800H

0010 0100 2800 0025 0000 0000 0000 0000
N HEX Details
2 10 16 (16 = 0010H)
3 01 Function Code
4 00 0100H Read/respond I/O register
6 00 2800H
7 00 I/O register data 1
8 25 2800, 2802, 2805 ON 00100101B = 25H
9 00
I/O register data 2
10 00
11 00
I/O register data 3
12 00
13 00
I/O register data 4
14 00
15 00
I/O register data 5
16 00

 Return to Home Position
Example of operation for the following assignment
Register Number Bit Details

2001 1 Return to home position – IN
2802 1 Returned to home position – OUT
Return to home position ON

• Client  Press, 2001H ON
000A 0102 2001 0001 0001
N HEX Details
2 0A 10 = 000AH
3 01 Function Code
4 02 0102H Write I/O register
6 01 2001H
7 00 Write Register Number
8 01 1 point
9 00 I/O Relay Data 1
Least significant bit ON
10 01
0000000000000001B = 0001H
• Press  Client, Response

0008 0102 2001 0001
Returned to home position ON (Check Register Number 2802H ON)

• Client  Press, 2800H Read I/O Register Number 1
0008 0100 2802 0001

0008 0100 2802 0001

Return to home position OFF
• Client  Press, 2001H OFF
000A 0102 2001 0001 0000
N HEX Details
2 0A 10 = 000AH
3 01 Function Code
6 01 2001H
7 00 Write Register Number
8 01 1 point
9 00 I/O Register Data 1
Least significant bit OFF
10 00
0000000000000000B = 0000H

0008 0102 2001 0001
 Set Program Number, Start Program

Example of operation for the following assignment (Set program number)
Relay Number Bit Details

2003 1 Set program number - IN
210 32 Program number - IN
2860 1 Program number set acknowledge - OUT
288 32 Program number - OUT
Set program number - 5

• Client  Press, Register “5” to 210H and 211H
000C 0103 0210 0002 0005 0000
N HEX Details
2 0C 12 = 000CH
3 01 Function Code
6 10 210H
7 00 Write register number
8 02 2 words (32 bit)
10 05 0005H Lower level Two-word register is registered and transmitted
11 00 I/O register data 2 in order of lower and upper levels.
12 00 0000H Upper level

0008 0103 0210 0002

Set program number - ON
000A 0102 2003 0001 0001
N HEX Details
2 0A 10 = 000AH
3 01 Function Code
4 02 0102H Write I/O relay
5 20 Top I/O Relay Number
6 03 2003H
7 00 Write register number
8 01 1 point
9 00 I/O relay data 1
10 01 Least significant bit ON 0000000000000001B = 0001H

0008 0102 2003 0001
Set program number - OFF

000A 0102 2003 0001 0000

0008 0102 2003 0001
Example of operation for the following assignment (Start program)

2005 1 Start program - IN
Start program - ON
000A 0102 2001 0001 0001

0008 0102 2005 0001
Start program - OFF

000A 0102 2005 0001 0000

0008 0102 2005 0001

 Monitoring Current Position and Current Load
Example of operation for the following assignment

2900 1 Monitor data strobe – OUT
292 32 Current position – OUT
294 32 Current load - OUT
296 32 Monitor data number – OUT
Read each register

• Client  Press, Read 8-word data from 290H
0008 0101 0290 0008
N HEX Details
2 08 8 = 0008H
3 01 Function Code
4 01 0101H Read I/O register
6 90 0290H
8 08 8 words
• Press  Client, Read 8-word data from 290H

0016 0101 0290 0001 0000 3D3F 0001 0632 0000 009E 0000
N HEX Details
2 16 22=0016H
3 01 Function Code
4 01 0101H Read I/O register Response
6 90 0290H
8 01 0290H Least significant bit ON Monitor data strobe ON
10 00 0291H
11 3D I/O register data 3 00013D3FH = 81215
12 3F 0292H Current position Lower level Current position 81.215 mm
14 01 0293H Current position Upper level
15 06 I/O register data 5 00000632H = 1586
16 32 0294H Current position Lower level Current load 1586 N
18 00 0295H Current position Upper level
19 00 I/O register data 7 0000009EH = 158
20 9E 0296H Monitor data number Lower level
22 00 0297H Monitor data number Upper level

7.5.18 Example of Programming Register via Ethernet I/O
This example shows assignment of programming register as:
• Register number 210H for Input top
• Register number 290H for Output top
Register numbers are set as below.
 Input register
Register
number
Input top+0 210 Execute command bit 0 OFF  ON Execute command
Input top+1 211 Command code 0000H: Add program
0004H: Write program
0005H: Read program
0040H: Add program
0044H: Write step data
0045H: Read step data
0060H: Add step judgment
0061H: Delete step judgment
0064H: Write step judgment data
0065H: Read step judgment data
1000H: Save set data
(Write to FROM)
Input top+2 212 ID1(Program number) Specify program number
Input top+3 213 ID2(Step number) Specify step number
Input top+4 214 ID3(Step number) Specify step judgment number
Input top+5 215 Reserve system Reserve
Input top+6 216 Item number Specify item number
Input top+7 217 Reserve system Reserve
Input top+8 218 Data (lower) Lower word of write data
Input top+9 219 Data (upper) Upper word of write data
 Output register
Register
number
Output top+0 290 Command executing bit0 Ready (0:Busy 1:Ready)
status bit1 Error (0:Normal 1:Error)
Output top+1 291 Error code 0: Normal
2: Command error
3: Add error
4: Delete error
5: Out of range of write data
6: Write error
7: Read error
8: Out of range of program number
9: Program run error
Output top+2 282 Data (lower) Lower word of read data
Output top+3 293 Data (upper) Upper word of read data

 Make an Additional Program Number 5
• Client  Press, Add program (0000H), Program number 5
001A 0103 0211 0009 0000 0005 0000 0000 0000 00010000 0000 0000
N HEX Details
1-2 001A Communication byte number 26＝001AH
3-4 0103 Function code 0103H I/O Write register
5-6 0211 Top I/O Register number 211H
7-8 0009 Number of register written 9 words
9-10 0000 211 Command 0000H Add program
11-12 0005 212 Program number 5
13-14 0000 213 Step number 0
15-16 0000 214 Step judgment number 0
17-18 0000 215 Reserve system 0
19-20 0001 216 Item number 1 Drive mode：Const. Speed/Stop at the set Pos.
23-24 0000 218 Data (lower) 0
25-26 0000 219 Data (upper) 0

0008 0103 0211 0009
• Client  Press, 2100H ON (Execute command)

000A 0102 2100 0001 0001
N HEX Details
1-2 000A Communication byte number 10=000AH
3-4 0102 Function code 0102H I/O Write relay
5-6 2100 Top I/O Relay number 2100H
7-8 0001 No. of items written 1
9-10 0001 I/O Relay data1 1 Lowest bit ON

0008 0102 2100 0001

000A 0102 21000001 0000
N HEX Details
3-4 0102 Function code 0102H I/O Write relay
7-8 0001 No. of items written 1
9-10 0000 I/O Relay data1 1 Lowest bit OFF

0008 0102 2100 0001

• Client  Press, Read 2 I/O relays from 2900H
0008 0100 2900 0002
N HEX Details
1-2 0008 Communication byte number 8＝0008H
3-4 0100 Function code 0100H I/O Read relay
7-8 0002 No. of items read 2
• Press  Client, Read 2 I/O relays from 2900H, Response

0008 0100 2900 0001
N HEX Details
1-2 0008 Communication byte number 8＝0008H
3-4 0100 Function code 0100H I/O Read relay
7-8 0001 I/O Relay data1
Confirm Ready, Normal
 Program Number 5, Set Drive Stat Position as 75.000mm

• Client  Press, Write program data (0004H) Set Command
001A 0103 0211 0009 0004 0005 0000 0000 0000 0005 0000 24F8 0001
N HEX Details
7-8 0009 No. of register written 9 words
9-10 0004 211 Command 0004H Write program data
13-14 0000 213 Step number 0
19-20 0005 216 Item number 5:Drive start position
23-24 24F8 218 Data (lower) 24F8 75.000mm → 75000 = 000124F8H
25-26 0001 219 Data (upper) 0001

0008 0103 0211 0009

000A 0102 2100 0001 0001

0008 0102 2100 0001


000A 0102 2100 0001 0000

0008 0102 2100 0001

0008 0100 2900 0002

0008 0100 2900 0001
 Program Number 5, Step 1, Set Drive End Position as 80.000mm

• Client  Press, Program Number 5, Step 1. Drive End Position, Set Write Command
001A 0103 0211 0009 0044 0005 0001 0000 0000 0005 0000 3880 0001
N HEX Details
9-10 0044 211 Command 0044H Write step data
13-14 0001 213 Step number 1
19-20 0005 216 Item number 5:Drive end position
23-24 3880 218 Data (lower) 3880 80.000mm → 80000 = 00013880H
25-26 0001 219 Data (upper) 0001

0008 0103 0211 0009

000A 0102 2100 0001 0001

0008 0102 2100 0001


000A 0102 2100 0001 0000

0008 0102 2100 0001

0008 0100 2900 0002

0008 0100 2900 0001
 Save Data
• Client  Press, Set Save Data Command (1000H)
001A 0103 0211 0009 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
N HEX Details
9-10 1000 211 Command 1000H Save data
13-14 0000 213 Step number 0
19-20 0000 216 Item number 0
23-24 0000 218 Data (lower) 0
25-26 0001 219 Data (upper) 0

0008 0103 0211 0009

000A 0102 2100 0001 0001

0008 0102 2100 0001


000A 0102 2100 0001 0000

0008 0102 2100 0001

0008 0100 2900 0002

0008 0100 2900 0001
7.6 Result Data Transmission

Results data is backed up using the lithium battery, and saved in units of executed programs.
Backup domains are 490kbyte.
When the results data is extracted by transmission, it is automatically deleted.
Note) If you are using the PC software JP-S SaS System to receive results data (JP-S Sampler), there
is no need to understand the contents of this chapter. The explanations here are only required if you
have created your own PC software, or are communicating from the PLC.
 Port number
Port number for access to Relay/Register (Ethernet I/O)

10028 Sending results data
Electro Press (JP-S) acts as server.

In order to start communication, it is required to establish connection of board number 10028 for JP-S
IP Address. Establish connection from external device (PLC, PC, etc.) as client.
In case connection cannot be established, check cable (cross cable for direct connection, straight
cable via hub), IP Address of external device, subnet mask, default gateway and board number
(10028).

• IP Address : 192.168.200.180
• Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
• Default gateway : 0.0.0.0
 Position data is described in long word (2 words, 4 bytes) in increments of 0.001 mm.
Data range: -999.999 mm – 999.999 mm
Binary indication: FFF0BDC1H – 000F423FH
 Load data is described in long word (2 words, 4 bytes) in increments of 1 [N].

Data range: -200000 [N] – 200000 [N] (-20t – 20t)
Binary indication: FFFCF2C0H – 00030D40H
7.6.1 Basic Communication Text

There are two formats of transmission texts used for communicating result data: one with data blocks
and one without. The format with data blocks is used when sending quality data and time series data.
Both formats have a communication byte number (2 bytes) and function code (2 bytes) at the head,
and if required has variable length data following the head.
Enter the total number of send text bytes in “No. of Send Bytes” (including communication byte number
itself). A maximum of 1024 bytes can be sent.
The function code is a code that displays this text function.
Without data
Communication Function code

byte number 2 bytes
No. of send bytes 4

With data (Quality control data, Time-Series data)
Communication Function code Number of Data Block 1 Block 2 Block N
byte number 2bytes blocks (N/Max 255) (Variable (Variable (Variable
2bytes 2bytes length) length) length)
No. of send bytes

MAX 1024 bytes
Block byte number Block code Block Data

2bytes 2bytes (Variable length)
No. of block bytes

MAX 1018 bytes
If there is a data, no. of data blocks follows the function code.

The block has a “No. of block bytes” and “Block code” at the head, and has variable length block data”
following the head.
The block code displays the contents of the block data.
 Arrangement Method of Multibyte Data (Byte Order)

Data of 2 or more bytes is arranged in order of upper and lower levels (big-endian).
For example, Acknowledge ACK (function code 0600H) does not have data, and the communication
byte number is 4 bytes. The actual communication text that is transmitted is as shown below.
 Communication text data example: Acknowledge

Communication
Function Code
bytes number
00 04 06 00
Position data and load data in result data are described in two words
Data is transmitted in order of lower and upper levels.
With the Ethernet I/O, two-word data is processed in reverse order.

7.6.2 Result Data Send Procedure
The data send and receive procedures when sending and receiving results data is as shown in the
schematic diagram below.
Only the function codes are written in the transmission data shown in the diagram. For example, the
actual sent text for the acknowledge send data is “00040600H”.
For details on the type of function code and details of the data block, refer to “7.6.3 Function Code”
onwards.
Client Press
1.
Result Data 1. Receive mode start is announced for the
Acknowledge
Receive Mode Start result data for the press
0600H
0118H
2. End program 2. If the program is ended during receive

Quality control data
Send starts mode, the press announces the start of
Acknowledge 0110H
0600H quality control data send to the client
3. 0100H
Acknowledge 3. The quality control data for that shot is sent
0600H
4. When all of the quality control data is sent,

4. Quality control send end is announced
data
Acknowledge Send completed
0600H 0111H
5. Time-series data 5. Next, sending start of the time-series data
Send starts is announced
Acknowledge 0112H
0600H
Time-series data 6. The time-series data for that shot is sent

0101H
6
7. Time-series data
Send completed
Acknowledge 7. When all of the time-series data is sent,
0600H 0113H
send end is announced
End program

Send starts
8. Each time the program ends, the same
Acknowledge
0110H process is performed
0600H
8.
Time-series
data Send
completed
Acknowledge 0113H
0600H
9. 9. When the receive mode end is announced
Result Data
Receive Mode End
to the press, even if other programs are
0119H Acknowledge ended, the result data is no longer
0600H
transmitted.

7.6.3 Function Code
Function
Name Data Function
Code
Quality control data 0100H Yes Code when quality control data is sent Data has
quality control data
For details on the quality control data refer to
“7.6.4 Quality Control Data.”
Time-Series data 0101H Yes Code when time-series data is sent
Data has time-series data
For details on the time-series data, refer to “7.6.6
Time-Series Data.”
Quality control data send 0110H None Quality control data (for 1 shot) send starts
starts
Quality control data send 0111H None Quality control data (for 1 shot) send ends
ends
Time-Series data send 0112H None Time-series data (for 1 shot) send starts
starts
Time-Series data send 0113H None Time-series data (for 1 shot) send ends
ends
Result data receive 0118H None The mode for receiving results data (quality control
mode Start data, time-series data) starts. After receiving this
command, the press sends results data for each
shot. There is quality control data and time-series
data in the results data. Settings for the sent data
are performed in the *“Mode of the saving result
data” parameter.
If the settings are configured in *“Store Quality
Data”, only quality control data is sent.
If “Quality and Time-Series Data” is set,
time-series data is sent after the quality control
data.
If *“Do not store the result data” is set, nothing is
sent.
Result data receive 0119H None Result data receive mode ends.
Mode End
Acknowledge 0600H None Receive text could be processed
Negative acknowledge 1500H None Receive text could not be processed
- Cannot receive the data quantity of the specified
send bytes (timeout)
- Unsupported block codes exist in the data
- Block data that cannot be processed normally is
present (upper/lower limit error in the set data etc.)
- Other error

7.6.4 Quality Control Data
Quality control data is formed with the following tables.
Name Block Code Details

1) Program result block 0000H 1 block
2) Step drive results block 0004H Blocks for the number of stages
3) Step sensor results block 0005H Blocks for the number of judgments for each
level
1. Program result block

No. of
N Details
Bytes
1-2 2 No. of Block Bytes (184 = 00B8H)
3-4 2 Block Code (0000H)
5-8 4 Program number
1-3 40 one-byte characters Program name (1st character)
1-3 UTF-8 used Program name (2nd character)
1 character is max. 3 bytes ・・・
9-132 1-3 40*3=120 Program name (40th character)
+ NULL terminate Program name (NULL)
1 =121 (domain is 124)
Unused domain is 0
133-136 4 Execute program Year 0-99
137-140 4 Execute program Month 1-12
141-144 4 Execute program Day 1-31
145-148 4 Execute program Hour 0-23
149-152 4 Execute program Minute 0-59
153-156 4 No. of pressing steps
157-160 4 Touching position
161-164 4 Touching Load
165-168 4 Program End Position
169-172 4 Program End Load
173-176 4 Judgment results OK/NG 0: OK -1: NG
177-180 4 Program drive results 0: Finish -1: Finish in middle
Finish in middle code
0: Normal end
1: Maximum load error
2: Position limit over
3: Maximum drive distance error
4: Maximum drive time error
181-184 4 5: Step judgment NG
7: Program Suspension
8: Maximum stroke error
9: Load zone sensor fault
10: Servo error
11: Sensor fault
12: Emergency stop

2. Step drive result block
No. of
NO Details
Bytes
1-2 2 No. of Block Bytes (32 = 0020H)
9-12 4 Step number
Step drive type
1: Constant speed/Stop at the setting position
2: Constant speed/Stop at the setting distance
3: Constant speed/Stop at the setting load
4: Constant speed/Stop at the setting increase load
13-16 4
5: Constant speed/Stop at the setting event
6: Constant load/Stop at the setting time
7: Constant load/Stop at the setting position
8: Constant load/Stop at the setting distance
9: Constant load/Stop at the setting event
17-20 4 Step end position
21-24 4 Step end load
25-28 4 Step sensor number (No. of judgments in the step)
29-32 4 Reserved domain
3. Step sensor result block

No. of
NO Details
Bytes
1-2 2 No. of Block Bytes
9-12 4 Step number
13-16 4 Judgment number of step
17-XX The data below conforms to “Judgment type results format”
(refer to “7.6.5 Judgment Type Results Format”)

7.6.5 Judgment Type Results Format
1. Load Zone Sensor
N Byte Details
17-20 4 Judgment type code: 1
21-24 4 Judgment results 0: OK, -1: Upper NG, -2: Lower NG,
-3: Out of judgment range NG
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit load value (upper limit load at the timing of judgment)
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit load value (lower limit load at the timing of judgment)
33-36 4 Judgment load value
37-40 4 Judgment position
2. Load Sensor/Given Pos.

N Byte Details
3. Load Sensor/Given dis.

N Byte Details
37-40 4 Judgment distance
4. Position Sensor (Start)

N Byte Details
21-24 Judgment results 0: OK, -1: Upper NG, -2: Lower NG,
4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit load value

N Byte Details
4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit peak load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit peak load value
33-36 4 Judgment peak load value

N Byte Details
4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit peak load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit peak load value
33-36 4 Judgment peak load value
7. Bottom Load Sensor/Given Pos.

N Byte Details
4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit bottom load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit bottom load value
33-36 4 Judgment bottom load value
8. Bottom Load Sensor/Given dis.

N Byte Details
4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit bottom load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit bottom load value
33-36 4 Judgment bottom load value
9. Top Load Sensor/Given Pos.

N Byte Details
4
-3: Out of judgment range NG, -4: No judgment value NG
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit top load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit top load value
33-36 4 Judgment top load value
10. Top Load Sensor/Given dis.

N Byte Details
Judgment results 0: OK, -1: Upper NG, -2: Lower NG,
21-24 4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit top load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit top load value
33-36 4 Judgment top load value

11. Valley Load Sensor/Given Pos.
N Byte Details
21-24 4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit valley load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit valley load value
33-36 4 Judgment valley load value
12. Valley Load Sensor/Given dis.

N Byte Details
Judgment results 0: OK, -1: Upper NG, -2: Lower NG, -3: Out of judgment
21-24 4
range NG, -4: No judgment value NG
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit valley load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit valley load value
33-36 4 Judgment valley load value

N Byte Details
21-24 4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit peak to peak load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit peak to peak load value
33-36 4 Judgment peak to peak load value

N Byte Details
4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit peak to peak load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit peak to peak load value
33-36 4 Judgment peak to peak load value

N Byte Details
17-20 4 Judgment type code:16
4
-3: Out of judgment range NG, -4: No judgment values NG
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit differential 1 load value
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit differential 1 load value
33-36 4 Differential gradient judgment value
37-40 4 Judgment differential 1 load value
41 – 44 4 Judgment position
45 – 48 4 Differential gradient value

N Byte Details
17-20 4 Judgment type code:17
21-24 4
45-48 4 Differential gradient value

N Byte Details
21-24 4

N Byte Details
21-24 4

19. Position Sensor (End)
N Byte Details
21-24 4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit position
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit position
20. Load Sensor・Given Dis.(End)

N Byte Details
21-24 4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit load
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit load
33-36 4 Judgment load
21. Load Sensor (End)

N Byte Details
21-24 4
25-28 4 Judgment upper limit load
29-32 4 Judgment lower limit load
22. Load Path Sensor・Given Pos.

N Byte Details
21-24 4 Judgment path 0: A path, 1: B path, 2: C path
Judgment results 0: OK, -3: Out of judgment range NG,
25-28 4
-4: No sensor value NG, -5: NG
29-32 4 Judgment load value (ENTER)
33-36 4 Judgment position (ENTER)
37-40 4 Judgment load (EXIT)
41-44 4 Judgment position (EXIT)
45-48 4 Reserved
49-52 4 Reserved
53-56 4 Reserved
57-60 4 Reserved
61-64 4 Reserved

23. Load Path Sensor・Given Dis.
N Byte Details
21-24 4 Judgment path 0: A path, 1: B path, 2: C path
Judgment results 0: OK, -3: Out of judgment range NG,
25-28 4
-4: No sensor value NG, -5: NG
29-32 4 Judgment load value (ENTER)
33-36 4 Judgment distance (ENTER)
37-40 4 Judgment load (EXIT)
41-44 4 Judgment distance (EXIT)
45-48 4 Reserved
49-52 4 Reserved
53-56 4 Reserved
57-60 4 Reserved
61-64 4 Reserved
7.6.6 Time-Series Data

Time-series data is created from the time-series data block (multiple blocks depending on data length).
 Time-series data block

N Byte Details
1-2 2 No. of Block Bytes
9-12 4 Sampling interval 0: 5msec 1: 10msec 2: 20msec 3: 50msec 4: 100msec
13-16 4 All time-series data quantity
17-20 4 Time-series data starting number for this block
21-24 4 Time-series data number (N) for this block
25-28 4 Data 1 Position
29-32 4 Load
33-36 4 Data 2 Position
37-40 4 Load
・・・
4 Data N Position
4 Load

7.6.7 Quality Control Data (received example)
The following is a sample received quality control data.
The sample has two-phase drive in program number 1 and a judgment (load judgment, set position) in
the second line. The sample does not have signal sampling result.
In order to receive quality control data, it is required to set parameter [Mode of the saving result data]
as [Store Quality Data] and transmit the parameter value to the Electro Press. Setting and transmission
performed using the PC software JP-S Designer. For details on how to use this software, see the
operation manual PC Operation.
Before starting communication, it is required to establish connection of board number 10028.
 Port Number
Port number for receiving result data

10028 Receive results data
Start receiving result data

• Client  Press, Start receiving result data
00040118
N HEX Details
1-2 0004 No. of Communication Bytes 4 = 0004H
3-4 0118 Function Code 0118H
• Press  Client, Acknowledge

00040600
N HEX Details
3-4 0600 Function Code 0600H Acknowledge
 Perform one shot

Start receiving result data
• Press  Client, Start sending quality control data
00040110
N HEX Details
3-4 0110 Function Code 0110H Start sending quality control data
• Client  Press, Acknowledge

00040600
N HEX Details

• Press  Client, Program result block
00BE0100000100B80000000000010000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000A0000000A0000001700000012
00000029000000020001185E000001950000C7E700000080000000000000000000000000
N HEX Details
1-2 00BE No. of Communication Bytes 190=00BEH
3-4 0100 Function Code, Quality Control Data 0100H
5-6 0001 No. of Block 1=0001H
7-8 00B8 Block 1, No. of Bytes 84 = 00B8H
9-10 0000 Block 1, Block Code: Program Result Block 0000H
11-14 00000001 Program No 1 – 00000001H
15-138 ・・・・ Program Name (124Bytes)
139-142 0000000A Execute Program Year 0-99 2010 10 = 0000000AH
143-146 0000000A Execute Program Month 1-12 October 10 = 0000000AH
147-150 00000017 Execute Program Day 1-31 23rd 23 = 00000017H
151-154 00000012 Execute Program Hour 0~23 18 18 = 00000012H
155-158 00000029 Execute Program Minute 0-59 41 41 = 00000029H
159-162 00000002 No. of Pressing Steps 2 steps
163-166 0001185E Work contact position 71.774mm 71774 = 0001185EH
167-170 00000195 Touching Load 405N 405 = 00000195H
171-174 0000C7E7 Program End Position 51.175mm 51175 = 0000C7E7H
175-178 00000080 Program End Load 128N 128 = 00000080H
179-182 00000000 Judgment Results OK/Fault 0: OK
183-186 00000000 Program Results 0: OK
187-190 00000000 Program process stopped code 0: Program ended normal
• Press  Client, Acknowledge

00040600
N HEX Details
• Press  Client, Step 1 Result Block

002601000001002000040000000100000001000000010001387F000005C70000000000000000
N HEX Details
5-6 0001 No. of Block 1 = 0001H
7-8 0020 Block 1, No. of Bytes 32 = 0020H
9-10 0004 Block 1, Block Code: Step Drive Result Block 0004H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
15-18 00000001 Step No. 1 = 00000001H
19-22 00000001 Step Drive Mode Constant Speed/Position Stop 11
23-26 0001387F Step End Position 79.999mm 79999 = 0001387FH
27-30 000005C7 Step End Load 1479N 1479 = 000005C7H
31-34 00000000 No. of Step sensor 0
35-38 00000000 Reserved domain 00000000H (fixed)

00040600
N HEX Details
• Press  Client, Step 2 Result Block, Step 2 Judgment Block

004E010000020020000400000001000000020000000100015F8E00000AB10000000100000000
002800050000000100000002000000010000000200000000000009CB000007DE000009400001
5421
N HEX Details
1-2 004E No. of Communication Bytes 78 = 004EH
5-6 0002 No. of Block 2 = 0002H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
15-18 00000002 Step No. 2 = 00000002H
19-22 00000001 Step Drive Mode Constant Speed/Position Stop 1
23-26 00015F8E Step End Position 89.998mm 89998 = 00015F8EH
27-30 00000AB1 Step End Load 2737N 2737 = 00000AB1H
31-34 00000001 No. of Step sensor 1
35-38 00000000 Reserved domain 00000000H (fixed)
43-46 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
47-50 00000002 Step No. 2 = 00000002H
51-54 00000001 Step sensor First 1 =0 0000001H
55-58 00000002 Judgment Type Load Judgment/Given Distance 2
59-62 00000000 Judgment Result OK:0
63-66 000009CB Judgment Upper Limit Load 2507N 2507 = 000009CBH
67-70 000007DE Judgment Lower Limit Load 2014N 2014 = 000007DEH
71-74 00000940 Judgment Load 2368N 2368 = 00000940H
75-78 00015421 Judgment Position 87.073mm 87073 = 00015421H

00040600
N HEX Details
• Press  Client, Finish transmitting quality control data (1 shot)

00040111
N HEX Details
3-4 0111 Function Code 0111H Finish transmitting quality control data (1shot)

00040600
N HEX Details
If the time-series data is not necessary, follow the steps below to receive the quality control data only
and finish data receiving. Proceed to “7. 6. 8. Time-Series Data (Example of receiving data)” when
receiving the time-series data.
• Press  Client, Start transmitting time-series data (1 shot)

00040112
N HEX Details
3-4 0112 Function Code 0112H Finish transmitting time-series data (1shot)

00040600
N HEX Details
• Press  Client, Finish transmitting time-series data (1 shot)

00040113
N HEX Details
3-4 0113 Function Code 0113H Finish transmitting time-series data (1shot)

00040600
N HEX Details

7.6.8 Time-Series Data (Example of receiving data)
The following is a sample of receiving time-series data.
Electro Press is actually set for “Quality Control Data + Time-Series Data); when 1 shot is performed
quality control data is sent (refer to “7.6.7 Quality Control Data (received example)”).
After having received “Finish Transmitting Quality Control Data (000140111), Acknowledge
(00040600) is returned. Then sending “Start Transmitting Time-Series Data”.
• Press  Client, Start transmitting time-series data (1 shot)

00040112
N HEX Details
3-4 0112 Function Code 0112H Start Transmitting Time-Series data (1 shot)

00040600
N HEX Details
• Press  Client, Time-Series Data 1
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1120A000000EC00011226000000E50001123A000000EC0001125A000000EC0001126A000000
EC0001128A000000EC0001129E000000EC000112BE000000FC000112D2000000FC000112EE
000000F400011302000000FC0001131E000000F400011336000000FC00011353000000FC0001
13670000010300011387000001030001139600000103000113B600000103000113CA000001030
00113EA0000011A000113FE0000010B0001141A0000010B0001142E0000010B0001144F00000
112000114620000011A0001147E000001220001149200000129000114B200000129000114C200
000129000114E200000129000114F5000001290001150A00000131
N HEX Details
1-2 03EE No. of Communication Bytes 1006=03EEH
3-4 0101 Function Code, Time-Series Data 0101H
5-6 0001 No of Block 1=0001H
7-8 03E8 Block 1, No. of Bytes 1000 = 03E8H
9-10 0007 Block 1, Block Code: Time-Series Data 0007H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
15-18 00000000 Sampling interval 0:5 msec 0 = 00000000H
19-22 00000182 No. of All Time-Series Data 386 386 = 00000182H
23-26 00000000 First Time-Series Data No. of Step 0 as first
27-30 0000007A No. of Time-Series Data of Block 122 = 0000007AH
31-34 0000C35D Position 50.0m 50013 = 0000C35DH
35-38 00000062 Load 1 98N 98 = 00000062H
39-42 0000C376 Position 2 50.038mm 50038 = 0000C376H
43-46 00000071 Load 2 113N 113 = 00000071H
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
991-994 000114F5 Position 121 70.901mm 70901 = 000114F5H
995-998 00000129 Load 121 297N 297 = 00000129H
999-1002 0001150A Position 122 70.922mm 70922 = 0001150AH
1003-1006 00000131 Load 122 305N 305 =0 0000131H

00040600
N HEX Details

03EE0101000103E800070000000100000000000001820000007A0000007A0001152600000139
000115.................60000060400013BFC0000061B00013CA80000063200013D3F00000632
N HEX Details
5-6 0001 No of Block 1=0001H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
23-26 0000007A First Time-Series Data No. of Step 122 = 0000007AH
27-30 0000007A No. of Time-Series Data of Block 122=0000007AH
31-34 00011526 Position 123 70.950mm 70950 = 00011526H
35-38 00000139 Load 123 313N 313 = 00000139H
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
999-1002 00013D3F Position 244 81.215mm 81215 = 00013D3FH
1003-1006 00000632 Load 1586N 1586 = 00000632H

00040600
N HEX Details

03EE0101000103E80007000000010000000000000182000000F40000007A00013DF300000651
00013E760000066100013F2F00000668....
067B0000008000010180000000690000FE6300000071
N HEX Details
5-6 0001 No of Block 1=0001H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
23-26 000000F4 First Time-Series Data No. of Step 244=000000F4H
27-30 0000007A No. of Time-Series Data of Block 122=0000007AH
31-34 00013DF3 Position 245 81.395mm 81395 = 00013DF3H
35-38 00000651 Load 245 1617N 1617 = 00000651H

N HEX Details
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
999-1002 0000FE63 Position 366 65.123mm 65123 = 0000FE63H
1003-1006 00000071 Load 366 113N 113 = 00000071H

00040600
N HEX Details

03EE0101000103E800070000000100000000000001820000016E000000140000FA0700000069
0000F6EB000000620000F200000000710000EEFF000000710000EAEA000000880000E819000
000710000E3C7000000710000E132000000620000DDC1000000710000DB6C000000690000D7
EB000000710000D5DF000000880000D334000000690000D16F000000620000CED8000000690
000CD64000000780000CB8D000000800000CA61000000780000C8C2000000800000C7E7000
00080000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000

N HEX Details
5-6 0001 No of Block 1=0001H
11-14 00000001 Program No. 1 = 00000001H
23-26 0000016E First Time-Series Data No. of Step 366=0000016EH
27-30 00000014 No. of Time-Series Data of Block 20 = 00000014H
31-34 0000FA07 Position 367 64.007mm 64007 = 0000FA07H
35-38 00000069 Load 367 105N 105 = 00000069H
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
183-186 0000C7E7 Position 386 51.175mm 51175 = 0000C7E7H
187-190 00000080 Load 386 128N 128 = 00000080H
・・・ 00000000 ・・・・・・・・・ 0 to be repeated up to end of block
999-1002 00000000
1003-1006 00000000

00040600
N HEX Details
• Press  Client, Finish transmitting time-series data (1 shot)

0040113
N HEX Details
3-4 0113 Function Code 0113H Finish Transmitting Time-Series data (1 shot)

00040600
N HEX Details

8. RS-232C
8.1 RS-232C Overview

The controller is equipped with RS-232C as standard.
RS-232C connector is located on the front side of the controller.
The following functions are available by sending/receiving data
to/from PC or external device via RS-232C.
1. Access to relay/register
2. Setting Ethernet IP address
RS-232C
connector
1. This is a function to control the Electro Press via RS-232C by accessing the relays/registers, the
same as done with Digital Input/Output (DIO) or a Fieldbus.
2. You can use the RS-232C port to set the Ethernet IP address of the controller, using the PC
software JP-S Designer. For details of setting, refer to the operation manual PC Operation “5.9.5 IP
Address Setting Press”.

8.2 RS-232C Connector
RS-232C Connector
Press Host (PC)
PIN No. Terminal Function PIN No. Terminal Function
3 RxD Receive data 3 TxD Send data
2 TxD Send data 2 RxD Receive data
8 RTS Send request 8 CTS Send OK
7 CTS Send OK 7 RTS Send request
5 GND Ground 5 GND Ground
Connector: D-SUB 9Pin Connector: D-SUB 9Pin
1 5
6 9
8.3 RS-232C Communication Setting (Baud Rate Setting)

Baud rate and parity can be set for communication of RS-232C.
• Baud rate
9600bps/19200bps/38400bps/57600bps
• Parity
None / Even number / Odd number
Set as parameter using the PC software JP-S Designer and select [Send Data] from the [Press] tab to
send to the Electro Press.
Note that data width (8 bit) and stop bit width (1 bit) are fixed and they cannot be changed.

8.4 RS-232C Communication Format
Communication format is show below, with top character ($) and terminator (CR) at each end, and
check SUM. All the values including check SUM are converted into hexadecimal numbers and they will
be sent using ASCII characters ('0’~'9’, 'A’~'F’). Therefore, data size of the value is as twice as big as
the original data size (byte number)
Total
$ CR
SUM
[SUM] Range
Port LEN FUNC DATA
[LEN] Range
Item Details Byte

$ Top character 1
Port Data identification port number 4
LEN Data width 4
FUNC Function code 4
Data body (depends on port number/function
DATA 1...
code)
SUM Check SUM value 2
CR Terminator (carriage return) 1
 Check SUM calculation

Check SUM value (SUM): Last 2 digits of the sum of the range in 8-bit indigent unit without sign.
The top character (S) is not included in the range.
Example
$ 2 4 2 9 0 0 0 F 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 C 2 C
R
2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 0
4 2 4 2 9 0 0 0 6 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 2 d
LEN (Data width) SUM (check SUM)

32H+34H+・・・+30H+31H
15bytes  000FH
= 50+52+・・・+48+49
= 962 = 3C2H
Last 2 digits: C2

8.5 Control by Access to Relay/Register via RS-232C
The Electro Press can be controlled by access to relay/register (I/O memory)
The port number for controlling by access to relay/register is 10029＝272DH.
• Port number
RS-232C I/O: For controlling by access to relay/register

10029＝272DH Control by access to relay/register
8.5.1 Data Send Procedure

 Relay/Register Read
Client sends “I/O Relay Read” command to the press. Press receives the command, and sends a
signal that has the I/O relay data as a block.
Client Press
I/O Relay
Read Normal If the same client sends an “I/O Data Read”
0100H response
0100H command to the press, the press receives the
command and sends the I/O register data as data
I/O Relay
Read Normal that has a block.
0101H response
0101H
 Relay/Register Write
Client Press
I/O Relay Client sends the “I/O Relay Write” command (with
Normal
Read the details to be written to the data block) to the
response
0102H
0102H
press. The press writes the received I/O relay
data, and returns a normal response.
I/O Data
Write Normal
0103H response The client sends the “I/O Relay Write” command
0103H (with the details to be written to the data block) to
the press. The press writes the received I/O relay
data, and returns a normal response.

8.5.2 Function Code
Function
Code
I/O relay read 0100H Reads the I/O relay state (ON/OFF) (Maximum 128
point continuous)
I/O data read 0101H I/O data value read (Maximum 64 points continuous)
I/O Relay write 0102H Value (ON/OFF) is written to I/O relay (Maximum 128
point continuous)
I/O data write 0103H Value is written to I/O data (Maximum 64 point
continuous)
I/O relay read abnormal 8100H Process was not performed correctly for the I/O relay
response read command
I/O data read abnormal 8101H Process was not performed correctly for the I/O data
response read command
I/O relay write abnormal 8102H Process was not performed correctly for the I/O relay
response write command
I/O data write abnormal 8103H Process was not performed correctly for the I/O data
response write command
8.5.3 I/O Relay Read

I/O relay data as many as the “Read point” from the top I/O relay number is output.
N Byte Details
1 4 Port Number (10029=272DH)
5 4 No. of Communication Bytes(4+4+4+4＝16＝0010H)
13 4 Top I/O Register Number: 3000H-3FFFH
17 4 Read point: 1-128 (m)

No. of
Port No. Communication Function Code Data
Bytes
Top I/O Relay No. Read register number
272DH 0010H 0100H 3000H-3FFFH 0001H-0080H
Example: Top I/O Relay Number= 3810H, Read register number=128=80H

$272D0010010038100080F5(CR)
I/O register data as many as “Read register number” from the top I/O register number is output.

13 4 Top I/O Relay Number: 3000H~3FFFH
17 4 I/O Relay Data 1 B0-B16 (I/O Relay data: Refer order of the bit store)
21 4 I/O Relay Data 2 B0-B16 (I/O Relay data: Refer order of the bit store)
・・・・
4 I/O Relay Data n B0-B16 (I/O Relay data: Refer order of the bit store)
• Normal Response
Port No. Bytes No. Function Code Data
Top I/O Register No I/O Relay Data 1
272DH 0010H-010CH 0100H 3000H-3FFFH
Data
I/O Relay Data 2 I/O Relay Data 3 - I/O Relay Data n
• Abnormal Response(Function Code Error)

272DH 000CH 8100H 0001H
• Abnormal Response (Data Error)

272DH 000CH 8100H 0002H

read points is not a multiple of 16, the left over bits are 0.
Top I/O relay number
0：OFF
1：ON

Data 1
・
・
・ B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B B B1 B0
Data n
Read Points: m, number of data: n

n = m/16 (roundup)
8.5.4 I/O Register Read (Read Numerical Type Data)

Requests the I/O register data of only the “Read register number” from the top I/O register number.
N Byte Details
5 4 No. of Communication Bytes (4+4+4+4=16=0010H)
13 4 Top I/O Register Number: 300H-3FFH
17 4 Read register number: 1-64 (n)
Port No. Byte Function Code Data

Top I/O Relay No. Read register No.
272DH 0010H 0101H 300H - 3FFH 0001H-0040H
Example: Top I/O Relay No. = 0374H, Read register No. 48 words=0030H
$272D0010010103740030F3(CR)

Outputs the I/O register data of only the “Read register number” from the top I/O register number.
N Byte Details
5 4 Bytes (4+4+4+4*n)
13 4 Top I/O Register Number: 300H~3FFH
・・・
4 Register data n
• Normal Response
Top I/O Register No
272DH 0010H-010CH 0101H 300H-3FFH
Register Data 1
Data
Register Data 2 Register Data 3 - Register Data n
For Register Data 1-Register Data n, 16bit is 1Data (Register). Read register data as many as required
will be consecutively output.
• Abnormal Response (Function Code Error)

272DH 000CH 8101H 0001H
• Abnormal Response (Data Error)

272DH 000CH 8101H 0002H

8.5.5 I/O Relay Write
I/O relay data write as many as the “Read point” from the top I/O relay number is requested.
N Byte Details
5 4 Bytes(4+4+4+4+4*n)
17 4 Write point: 1-128
・・・・
4 I/O Relay Data 1 B0-B16(See below)
Port Number Bytes Function Code Data
0010H-010CH Top I/O Relay No. Write point

272DH 0102H 3000H-37FFH 0001H-0080H
Data
I/O Relay data 1 I/O Relay data 2 I/O Relay data n

-

The read I/O relay status is stored in the sequence of lower level-> upper level. Also, if the number of
write points is not a multiple of 16, the left over bits are 0. Top I/O relay number
0：OFF
1：ON
B1 B1 B13 B1 B1 B1 B B B B B B B B B B
Data 1
・
・
・
B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B B B B B B B B B B
Data n
NOTE
• Always ensure that the specified write points match the data n number.
Write Points: m, number of data: n
n = m/16 (roundup)
For example, if there are 16 write points, set the data n number as 1 (word).

Example: Top I/O relay number-3000H, Write point m=16=0010H, n=1
$272D00140102300000103C3CD7(CR)
output.
• Normal Response
N Byte Details
5 4 Byte(s) (4+4+4+4=16=10H)
9 4 Function Code (0102)
13 4 Top I/O Relay Number: 3000H – 3FFFH
17 4 Write point: 1 – 128

Top I/O Relay No. Write points
272DH 0010H 0102H （Request value） (Request value)
• Abnormal Response (Abnormal function code)

272DH 000CH 8102H 0001H
• Abnormal Response (Abnormal data)

272DH 000CH 8102H 0002H
8.5.6 Register Write (Writing Numeric Data)

I/O register data as many as the “Write register number” from the top I/O register number is requested.
N Byte Details
5 4 Bytes (4+4+4+4+4*n)
17 4 Write register No.: 1-64 (n)
・・・・
4 Register data n

Top I/O Relay No Write points
0010H ... 0103H
272DH 300H-37FH 0001H-0040H
Data
Register Data 1 Register Data 2 - Register Data n
Example: Top I/O RegisterNO.=0300H, Write RegisterNo.=0002H（2）

$272D00180103030000023C3C5A5AC9(CR)
If write was performed according to the client request, the top I/O register number and write register no
are output (echo back).
• Normal Response
N Byte Details
5 4 Bytes(4+4+4+4=16=10H)
13 4 Top I/O Register Number:300H-3FFH
17 4 Write register No.: 1-64 (n)

Top I/O Register Write Register
272DH 0010H 0103H (Request Value) (Request Value)
• Abnormal Response (Abnormal function code)

272DH 000CH 8103H 0001H
• Abnormal Response (Abnormal Data)

272DH 000CH 8103H 0002H

9. SPECIFICATIONS
 JP-S 0501
Specifications JP-S0501
Maximum pressing capacity 5kN (510kgf)
Load detection denomination*1 2N
Stroke 100mm / 150mm / 250mm / 350mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01 – 216mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01 – 35mm/sec
Maximum holding time*2 999.9s
Load accuracy*3 ±50N for 0.5kN or more
Weight of jig attached to ram Up to 5kg
Compatible controller JP-SC0501
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180 – 250V
Motor power supply
1.4 – 2.0A 50/60Hz (200W)
Press unit (Stroke 100) 65W x 155D x 455H (mm), 12kg
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 150) 65W x 155D x 505H (mm), 13kg
mass (excluding Press unit (Stroke 250) 65W x 155D x 655H (mm), 16kg
cables/protrusions) Press unit (Stroke 350) 65W x 155D x 805H (mm), 18kg
Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1kg
Airborne Noise Not exceeding 79dB*4
*1 The load detection denomination is the A/D resolution capability. This is not an indicator of load
detection accuracy.
2
* With the JP-S0501, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately
1.5kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (5kN) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the
affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the
maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Make sure to set pressing conditions with enough
allowance for possible errors.
3
* The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
10% or more of the maximum pressing capacity. This is a denomination/accuracy of load detection,
and not the end load dispersion/accuracy.
Load accuracy is based on constant temperatures for both the press unit and the work environment.
High temperatures can affect the load sensor and cause the displayed load to change. With
applications which continuous running causes problems in relation to high temperatures, you need
to create thermal equilibrium through warm-up runs, or use the load offset automatic reset function
(for further details, refer to “2.1 Model/Adjustment Data”).
4
* Equivalent sound level measured from a distance of 1m from the press.
NOTE
• The above specifications are subject to change without prior notice to improve quality.

 JP-S 0501-01 / JP-S0501-11
Specifications JP-S0501-01 / JP-S0501-11
Stroke 100mm / 150mm / 250mm / 350mm
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01 – 35mm/sec
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180 – 250V
Motor power supply
1.8 – 4.0A 50/60Hz (400W)
detection accuracy.
*2 With the JP-S0501-01 / JP-S0501-11, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than
approximately 3kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (5kN) is applied. (Depending
on conditions, such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you
exceed the affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises,
the maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Make sure to set pressing conditions with
enough allowance for possible errors.
*3 The load detection accuracy is ±1% of the maximum pressing capacity when pressing in range of
*4 Equivalent sound level measured from a distance of 1m from the press.
NOTE

 JP-S 1001
Stroke 100mm/150mm/250mm
Ram speed (Approaching/Returning) 0.01-216mm/sec
Ram speed (Pressing) 0.01-35mm/sec
Load accuracy*3 ±100N for 1kN or more
Three-Phase or Single-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
1.8-4.0A 50/60Hz (400W)
Dimensions and
mass (excluding
cables/protrusions)
detection accuracy.
*2 With the JP-S1001, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 3kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (10kN) is applied. (Depending on conditions, such
as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed the affordable
holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the maximum
affordable holding time is shortened. Make sure to set pressing conditions with enough allowance
for possible errors.
NOTE

 JP-S1001-01 / JP-S1001-11
Stroke 100mm / 150mm / 250mm
Compatible controller JP-SC1001-01 / JP-SC1001-11
Motor power supply
5.3-7.5A 50/60Hz (750W)
Dimensions and
mass (excluding
cables/protrusions)
detection accuracy.
approximately 6kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (10kN) is applied. (Depending
on conditions, such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you
exceed the affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises,
the maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Make sure to set pressing conditions with
NOTE

 JP-S 1001-20
Specifications JP-S1001-20
Stroke 100mm/250mm
Clean class (under the outlet flow condition below) Class 1000 (0.30μm)
Outlet flows (Discharge rate) 60NL/min
Exhaust outlet diameter Inner diameter φ19 mm
Compatible controller JP-SC1001-20
Motor power supply
1.8-4.0A 50/60Hz (400W)
Dimensions and Press unit (Stroke 100) 98W x 178D x475H (mm), 13 kg
mass (excluding Press unit (Stroke 250) 98W x 178D x 695H (mm), 17 kg
cables/protrusions) Controller 79W x 163D x 287H (mm), 3.1 kg
detection accuracy.
*2 With the JP-S1001-20, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately
3kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (10kN) is applied. (Depending on conditions,

NOTE
• Clean room standards: Federal Standard 209D(FED-STD209D).

 JP-S 1501
Specifications 15kN (1530kgf)
Stroke 100mm/200mm/300mm/350mm/400mm/450mm
Motor power supply
5.3-7.5A 50/60Hz (750W)
detection accuracy.
NOTE

 JP-S 1501-20
Specifications 15kN (1530kgf)
Stroke 100mm/200mm/350mm/400mm
Motor power supply
5.3-7.5A 50/60Hz (750W)
detection accuracy.
2
* With the JP-S1501-20, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately
6kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (15kN) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
3
4
NOTE

 JP-S 2001
Load detection denomination *1 8N
Stroke 100mm/200mm/300mm/350mm/400mm
Motor power supply
5.3-7.5A 50/60Hz (750W)
Dimensions and
mass (excluding
cables/protrusions)
detection accuracy.
NOTE

 JP-S2001-01 / JP-S2001-11
Three-Phase, AC180-250V
Motor power supply
9.1-12.6A 50/60Hz (2kW)
Dimensions and
Press unit (Stroke 300) 80W x 241D x787H (mm), 32kg
mass (excluding
cables/protrusions)
detection accuracy.
approximately 10kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (20kN) is applied.
(Depending on conditions, such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible).
If you exceed the affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature
rises, the maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Make sure to set pressing conditions with
NOTE

 JP-S 2001-20 / JP-S 2001-30
Stroke 100mm/200mm/350mm/400mm
Motor power supply
5.3-7.5A 50/60Hz (750W)
detection accuracy.
2
* With the JP-S2001-20 and the JP-S2001-30, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more
than approximately 6kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (20kN) is applied.
(Depending on conditions, such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible).
If you exceed the affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature
rises, the maximum affordable holding time is shortened. Make sure to set pressing conditions with
3
4
NOTE

 JP-S 3001
Motor power supply
9.1-12.6A 50/60Hz (2kW)
Dimensions and
mass (excluding
cables/protrusions)
detection accuracy.
NOTE

 JP-S 3001-11
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
Dimensions and
mass (excluding
cables/protrusions)
Controller 147W x 188D x 365H (mm), 8kg
detection accuracy.
*2 With the JP-S3001-11, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately
17kN. Holding times are very short if the maximum load (30kN) is applied. (Depending on
conditions, such as pressing with a slow speed, a holding time may not be possible). If you exceed
the affordable holding time, a servo motor error occurs. Also, if the motor temperature rises, the
NOTE

 JP-S 5001
Stroke 200mm/300mm/400mm
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
Dimensions and
mass (excluding
cables/protrusions)
detection accuracy.
NOTE

 JP-S 5R01
Specifications JP-S5R01
Stroke 100mm / 200mm / 300mm / 350mm / 400mm
Compatible controller JP-SC5R01
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
Dimensions and
mass (excluding
cables/protrusions)
detection accuracy.
*2 With the JP-S5R01, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 20kN.
NOTE

 JP-S 10T1
Specifications JP-S10T1
Stroke 200mm/400mm
Compatible controller JP-SC10T1
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
cables/protrusions) Controller 147W x 188D x 365H (mm), 8kg
4
Airborne Noise Not exceeding 85dB*
detection accuracy.
*2 With the JP-S10T1, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 30kN.
Holding times are very short if the maximum load (100kN) is applied. (Depending on conditions,
NOTE

 JP-S 10R1
Specifications JP-S10R1
Stroke 200mm/400mm
Compatible controller JP-SC10R1
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
detection accuracy.
*2 With the JP-S10R1, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 30kN.
NOTE

 JP-S 20T1
Specifications JP-S20T1
Stroke 200mm/400mm
Compatible controller JP-SC20T1
Motor power supply
22.6-31.4A 50/60Hz (5kW)
detection accuracy.
*2 With the JP-S20T1, affordable holding times are shorter for a load of more than approximately 60kN.
NOTE

 Common specifications
Specifications All models
Repeatability*1 ±0.01mm
Life cycle*2 Varies depending on operation conditions
Ambient temperature 0 – 40°C
Ambient relative humidity Between 20 to 90 percent and without condensation
Controller power supply DC24V±10% 1.6A
Number of programs Up to 512*3
Number of load zone sensors One sensor for each program (up to 32 zones) *3
Number of program sensors Up to 16 (in a single program) *3
Number of steps Up to 512 (in a single program) *3
Number of step sensors Up to 16 (in a single step) *3
Data can be saved to the controller. Backups are made with
battery power and are not deleted even if the controller power is
Saving result data
shut down. Capacity is approximately 500kb. Equivalent to 300
seconds of sampling data.
*1 The repeatability value represents when pressing with fixed load conditions and with the unit and
environment at a constant temperature. Repeatability does not guarantee absolute accuracy.
When the ram expands due to heat, the absolute positions vary. For applications where continued
operation causes problems due to the effects of a rise in temperature, you need to get the press into
a state of thermal equilibrium by warming it up before using it.
**2 The life of expendable parts such as ball screws, etc., depend on the operation conditions.
Refer to “7. Replacing Consumable Parts” in the operation manual Setup and Maintenance for
further details.
*3 The number of programs, steps, and sensors depend on the total memory size (approximately 1
MB).
 Affordable pressing time (Standby Time, Duty)

The necessary standby time in between pressing depends on operation conditions. If using strict work
conditions, you need to have a period of cool down to make sure the motor does not get too hot.
Depending on operation conditions, you cannot run repeatedly without a standby time and therefore
you need to take time in between runs. If pressing with a large load for a long pressing distance or with
a long holding time, you need to take a long stand-by time. If the motor surface temperature
exceeds 100°C, an error occurs. Make sure to set a standby time so the temperature stays under
100°C.

Refer to the graphs on the next page for the pressing time in relation to the load.
The operation conditions for the graphs are as follows.
• Approaching distance ····················56mm
• Approaching speed ·······················Maximum
• Approaching acceleration ···············Maximum
• Approaching deceleration ···············Maximum
• Pressing speed ····························35mm/sec
Speed
Pressing
Approach Return Stand-by time
time
Time
Pressing is performed until the press reaches the specified position. The pressing time is considered
the pressing phase + the stop time.
The graphs describe limit lines with load on the horizontal axis and pressing time on the vertical axis for
stand-by times of 1, 2, 3, 5 and 10 seconds.
Operate the press in the range under these lines.
You can repeatedly press with a standby time of 0sec if pressing with less than 3.8kN for the JP-S1001,
less than 7kN for the JP-S2001 or less than 11kN for the JP-S3001 (the limit lines are cut-off at this
point in the graphs on the next page) however, measure the temperature of the motor with long
approaches and if the temperature is high, you may need to take time for a stop.

Use the press within a range that does not exceed a motor
surface temperature of 100°C.
Using the press when it has exceeded 100°C causes electric shock
and breakdown.
Warning If the motor does exceed 100°C, take steps to reduce the
temperature of the press by cooling it, taking longer standby times,
and having shorter pressing times, etc. Use the press after
confirming the motor temperature is less than 100°C.
 JP-S0501
JPS-0501　加圧可能時間
JPS-0501 Possible pressing time
6
Stand-by time
5
待機時間10s
10s
加圧時間[s]
待機時間8s
Pressing Time [s]
8s
4
待機時間5s
5s
待機時間3s
3s
3
待機時間2s
2s
1s
待機時間1s
2
0
2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5
荷重[KN]
Load [KN]

 JP-S0501-01 / JP-S0501-11
JP-S0501-01 / JP-S0501-11 Possible Pressing Time
Stand-by
Stand-bytime
time
10s 10s
5s 5s
3s 3s
2s 2s
1s 1s
 JP-S1001
JP-S1001　圧可能時間
JP-S1001 Possible Pressing Time
6
Stand-by time
5 待機時間10s
10s
加圧時間[s]
Pressing Time [s]
待機時間5s
5s
4 待機時間3s
3s
2s
待機時間2s
1s
待機時間1s
3
0
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
荷重[KN]
Load [KN]

 JP-S1001-01 / JP-S1001-11
Stand-by time
Pressing Time [s]
10s
5s
3s
2s
1s
Load [KN]
 JP-S1501
Stand-by time
10s
5s
Pressing Time [s]
3s
2s
1s
Load [KN]

 JP-S2001
Stand-by time
Pressing Time [s]
10s
5s
3s
2s
1s
Load [KN]
 JP-S2001-01 / JP-S2001-11
Stand-by time
10s
Pressing time [s]
5s
3s
2s
Load [KN]

 JP-S3001
JP-S 3001 Possible Pressing Time
Stand-by time
10s
5s
Pressing Time [s]
3s
2s
Load [KN]
 JP-S5001/JP-S5R01
JP-S5001/JP-S5R01 Possible Pressing Time
Stand-by time
10s
5s
Pressing Time[s]
3s
2s
1s
Load [KN]

 JP-S10T1/JP-S10R1
JP-S10T1/JP-S10R1 Possible Pressing Time
Stand-by time
9s
12s
Pressing time[s]
15s
20s
25s
Load [KN]
 JP-S20T1
JP-S20T1 Possible Pressing Time
Stand-by time
15s
Pressing time[s]
20s
25s
30s
35s
Load [KN]

10. GLOSSARY
【A】 Approach
ACK After the program starts, from the work starting
An input signal to display when handling is position to the position where pressing begins.
complete when the sending of data output The parameter for including or not including this
occurs. An abbreviation for ‘Acknowledgement’. operation is set from the program data.
Address Approach Enable/Disable

The number used to specify the I/O memory A Setting included within the program used to
data domain. There is a 1 bit unit for specifying decide whether or not pressing is carried out.
the relay number and a number to specify with Settings are the below types. The default
a 16 bit unit to specify the register number. setting is ‘enabled’.
Enabled: After the program starts, the ram
Alarm moves at full speed until it reaches the specified
1. The conditions that show the occurrence of position at which point probing is executed.
abnormalities that influence the operation. Disabled: After the program operation starts,
The alarm sounds and the operation is probing is executed.
terminated.
The ‘alarm number’ indicates the Area Codes
nature/content of the abnormality. The The numbers used to identify devices that are
‘alarm number’ is a failure diagnosis connected to the Fieldbus network.
function in JP Designer. This or the ‘Alarm
Failure No.1’ can confirm the cause of the 【B】
trouble. Big Endian
Remove the cause of the alarm and when When handling large byte data, the method to
the ‘alarm reset’ special relay is ON, the arrange the data top to bottom. At the time of
alarm will be cancelled. Ethernet interfacing, this method is used.
Reference: “5.2 Error Number List” in Setup Refer to Little Endian.
and Maintenance.
2. One of the functions assigned to the I/O Bit
memory. Assign it to the relay number and This is the smallest unit of electronic data,
use. indicated by a single binary digit, either a 0 or a
The number that displays the alarm. When 1.
the alarm occurs, it becomes ON, in when the The I/O memory relay has a single bit domain.
cause of the alarm is removed, the alarm will 8 bits = 1 byte, 16 bits = 1 word
turn OFF when the ‘alarm reset’ is put ON. Refer to: Byte
Refer to: “4.2.2 Common Functions (2) Errors” Word

Brake Deceleration Load Rate
This is a mechanical function of the JP-S unit. The percentage unit parameter that is used with
When the power source is OFF, the position of constant speed pressing/set hold load as well
the ram is maintained. You can enable and as constant speed pressing and additional load
disable this function. hold modes. The unit is (%). Its function is to
increase the precision of the load hold and once
Byte the ratio of the object load if the percentage of
This is an electronic data unit consisting of an 8 the current load against the target load meets
digit binary number. In decimal numbers, if can the value set in this parameter, the pressing
indicate a value from 0 to 255 without using a speed decreases to 1.0mm/s.
code. Refer to: “3.4.2 Slow Down Load Rate/Stop
1 byte = 8 bits; 2 bytes = 1 word Reference Point Position.”
The I/O memory register has a domain for 2
bytes (equaling 1 word). Digital Output
Refer to: Bit  See JOG Operation
Word
DIO
【C】 Digital input ‘Digital Input/Output’.
Command Codes The interface for exchanging with external
These numbers are used to designate the devices using an ON/OFF digital signal.
content of various operations when operating Alternatively, the signal itself.
the program creation register. To write numbers The menu relating to the above settings of the
into the register, enter the first number of the interface. For every single machine there is one
inputted registry +1. setting and it influences all programs. The
Refer to: “4.2.9 Program Setting Register” setting occurs in JP-S Designer.
Refer to: “5.3 Digital Input/Output (DIO) Settings”.
Check sum
A code used with the RS-232C interface for Differential
detecting errors. A differential or inclination, in the JP-S this
In the interface data, each individual digit is refers to the amount of load change.
added together and then this two-digit code
(one word) is added after the total body of data. Differential Judgment
By attaching it to the tail end of the data, it This Judgment applies to the point when
serves to check and see whether or not the changes to the load (inclination) cause the load
body of data is damaged. value to exceed a designated value. The
Judgment whether or not a differential has
【D】 occurred comes with a set load increase
Deceleration (inclination Judgment value) and the sensor
The speed the ram decelerates during operation. determines whether or not the measured
volume increase exceeds this value.

If the standard unit of measurement is controls the inferior device (slave) by integrating
time-based (N/s) the parameter is differential 1, the inferior device’s data. Multiple standard types
if it is distance-based (N/mm) it is differential 2. exist, with the JP-S compatible with DeviceNet,
PROFIBUS, CC-Link, CANopen, PROFINET
Drive and EtherNet/IP.
The process of using power to make something
move. In the case of the JPS, the drive power FROM
makes the ram operate. Also, this term is used Flash ROM abbreviation. Even if the power
to refer to pressing. source is cut, the memory remains.
【E】 Function Assignment

Encoder The job of setting a special relay/special
A device incorporated in the motor for detecting register to the memory domain.
the current position. When this is done, the special relay/special
register function is able to be used from the
Event Termination external device.
One kind of pressing operation method in which  Special relay/special register
when a specific relay is ON, pressing stops.
The relay that becomes the standard relay for Function code
operation is calling the ‘event stop relay’. The number that designates the content of the
operations to be performed which are sent in
External connection domains the input/output data using Ethernet or
Within the data domains, the domain for RS-232C interfacing. The code comes at the
operating external devices. Digital data 4th digit of the hexadecimal number after the
input/output is made using Fieldbus, Ethernet, interface data number. Refer to “7. Ethernet”
or RS-232C. and “8. RS-232C”
External instruction Operation 【G】

One kind of special relay/special register. Gain
When the instruction signal is ON, movement A parameter used to calculate the operational
occurs with regard to a specified position, speed when the pressing occurs with the fixed
distance and load. When the signal symbol load control. The unit is (%) and, proportional
turns OFF, it stops. gain, integral gain and differential gain exist.
Refer to “4.2.6 External Running” It shows the sensitivity of difference in between
the target load and the current load in the
【F】 speed and the bigger these values, the more
Fieldbus rapid the change to the pressing speed.
A digital interfacing method used primarily with Reference: “2.6 Constant Load Movement
industrial machinery. Through PLC (power line Gain”
communication), the superior device (master)

Gain Table Inclination Value
A table containing proportional gain, integral The parameter that is set by differential 1
gain, and differential gain parameters. Judgment and differential 2 Judgments.
16 tables can be registered. When the fixed When the load increments per time unit
load control is specified in the pressing mode, (differential 1 Judgment) as well as per unit
the table number is determined. length (differential 2 Judgment), exceed this
 Gain value, it is assumed there is a differential
occurrence. The units are (N/s) in addition to
【H】 (N/mm).
Home Position  Differential
The position that is the base coordinates of the
ram. Coordinate positions are measured by Internal Domain
how far the ram has moved from this position. Within the I/O memory, there is a domain that is
The home position is determined by ‘Home not for external interfacing.
Position Adjustment’. This is also the It is used by the internal program data.
mechanical initialization home position.  Refer to I/O memory
Home Position Adjustment Internal Register

The function that that sets the position of the The internal domain relay. The address range is
ram when it returns to home position. C00-FFF.
The coordinates set by this function become
the zero coordinates. Refer to: Setup and Internal relay
Maintenance “8.4 Setting the Ram Projection The internal domain relay. The address range is
Length and Home Position” C000-FFFF.
【I】【J】
I/O Memory JOG commands
The area name of ‘external interface domain’ When the relay signal is assigned, input from
and ‘internal domain used in program data’ external devices becomes possible.
together. With the relay register number, specify  JOG movement/JOG pressing
the address (domain). – External connection  Special relay – Special register
domain.
JOG Environment Data Settings
Inching The menu for setting the operational settings
The method of pressing whereby the ram related to the items of JOG.
presses making small movements. In the JP-S, Each machine has one setting and affects all
this is largely handled by a JOG operation. programs. The settings occur in JP-S Designer.
 JOG Operation JOG speed, JOG inching distance and JOG
mode maximum load can be set.
Refer to “2.3 JOG Environment Settings.”

JOG Operation Judgment Value Range
A function to operate the ram only when the This refers to the range of Judgment values that
movement command signal is ON. would be judged as OK (acceptable).
If the length of the signal is 500msec or less, it
only operates the specified distance (the inching 【L】
distance) and then stops (Inching operation) at Limit Positions
the designated speed. If the signal continues for This parameter sets the lower limit for the ram, it
more than 500msec, continue operation until the can descend during operation. It exists for
signal turns OFF. JOG1 contains UP/DOWN and movements such as probing, load stop pressing,
various command signals, JOG2 to move to the etc. which are not controlled by coordinates.
coordinate position and JOG3 to move to the If the ram moves beyond the position set here,
coordinate weight are all available features. a “Limit Position Error” (1008) occurs.
Refer to “4.2.8 JOG Functions.”
Linear Encoder
Judgment This is a device which detects the position of
This function examines program results to see the straight line axis and outputs it as position
whether or not load and position values are data. It is used to correct changes in the ball
within designated ranges. screw due to thermal expansion and position
Judgments include the “step Judgment” made variance from vibration.
while carrying out a step and the “end of step
Judgment” made when the step is completed, Little Endian
as well as the “end of program Judgment” This is a method of handling large byte data by
made when all the steps are complete. lining up the byte data bottom to top. This
Refer to “3.5 Step Sensor” method is used for arranging the data for
multiple registers in the I/O memory.
Judgment Range
This is where the ram stops pressing before it Load Cell
enters the Judgment range. The parameter By converting the applied pressure into
settings determine whether or not the Judgment electrical current, this device makes a real-time
is OK or NG (no good-unacceptable). detection of the applied load value.
A part built into the JP-S main unit whose
Judgment Value function is to manage the load. It can be
The value that becomes the subject of the calibrated using [Load Cell Adjustment] in the
Judgment. [Run/Adjust] tab of JP-S Designer.
In addition, it also refers to the value of the Also, using the optional “load cell output”
parameter that is subject to Judgment at the connector, it can output the current it detects.
time when such Judgment is made. Refer to: Setup and Maintenance “8.2 Load Cell
Amplifier Output Adjustment.”

Load Offset Automatic Reset Longword
A function to automatically set and correct the A data length of 2 words = (32 bit)
load offset value with a particular timing. When  Refer to word
using this function, after returning of the origin is
complete, or at the time of program completion, 【M】
the final load value becomes 0kN and the load Malfunction
offset value is automatically calculated and set. The state displays the possibility of that parts of
 Load offset value the JP-S interior have developed abnormalities.
 Refer to “2.1.2 Adjustment Data” When this occurs, the press stops operating
and it is not possible to run programs. In
Load Offset Value addition, LED’s 2 and 3 of the main controller
A parameter for the calculation of the load value. will start to blink.
Add this value to the detected load value, and Details of the malfunction can be identified with
lastly calculate the load value. → Detected the ‘Malfunction Numbers’. The ‘Malfunction
load value Number’ that appears can be confirmed using
 Load offset automatic reset the malfunction diagnosis function of the JP-S
Refer to “2.1.2 Adjustment Data”. Designer software as well as
‘Alarm/Malfunction Numbers 1’ in the special
Load Review register. Eliminate the cause of the problem and
The job of setting the load correction value to turn the power back ON and the (shut down
be added to the load detected by the load cell. due to) malfunction status is removed.
Refer to: Setup and Maintenance “8.3 Load Refer to: Setup and Maintenance “5.2 Error
Calibration” Number List”
Load Value Maximum Load

The combined value of the load detected by the The maximum value of the load is what that
load cell (the read load value) combined with the body can carry. It is decided according to the
load correction value. The JP-S indicator shows main unit’s specifications and alteration cannot
the force applied to the workpiece. However, be made.
when the value is wrong, it differs from the actual When a load that exceeds the value is detected,
applied force. When this happens, it is necessary ‘2007 maximum load error’ occurs and the
to perform a load calibration so as to accurately press stops.
calculate load corrections.
 Load calibration Maximum Pressing Power
A parameter found in the “Fixed Speed/Position
Lower limit NG Hold”, “Fixed Speed/Distance Hold” and “Fixed
In the case that the executed program result Speed/Event Hold” pressing modes. If a load
NG case that the program execution result has value exceeding this parameter is detected
a smaller value than the Judgment result range. while pressing, the error code 1000 “maximum
load error” occurs.

Maximum Stroke 【N】
The maximum coordinate that the ram can NG
press. It is defined in the main unit’s When the executed program result has is
specifications and cannot be altered. If an outside of the Judgment result range.
attempt to exceed the maximum stroke is made, When over the upper limit, it becomes over
‘1001 maximum stroke error’ will occur and it limit: NG, when under the lower limit, it
will be terminated. becomes under limit: NG.
Operation after NG has occurred settings can
Mechanical Home Position be made as to whether to continue the program
 Refer to: Home Position or finish the program for each Judgment item.
 Judgment
Monitor I/O Renewal Cycle
One of the “parameters” in the setting menu, it Numerical Types
is used for setting the renewal interval for the The identifiers for function assignments in the
“current value” handled by the monitor output. I/O memory, refers to the type used to
Refer to “2.2 Parameters” designate function assignments made for the
register address, as well as the relay address +
Monitor Output data width.
One of the functions that can be used with the Refer to: Register
special relay/special register that writes the
current position and current load into the 【O】
specified register. Out of Judgment Range
The interval for renewing the value is This is where the ram stops pressing before it
designated in ‘Monitor I/O Renewal Period’ in enters the Judgment range. The parameter
the ‘Parameters’ menu. settings determine whether or not the Judgment
Refer to “4.2.7 Monitor Output Function” is OK or NG (no good-unacceptable).
Monitor Strobe OK
One of the functions usable with the special When the executed program result is within the
relay/special register, with a 1bit signal it turns range of Judgment result.
OFF in time with the renewal of the current  Judgment
position and current load values from the
“Monitor Output”. Operation Start Position
This is the coordinate that completes the
Multistep Operation approach and moves to the probing function.
Operations with multiple operation steps. Set in the program data.
Refer to: “3.1 Program Data”

【P】 position as determined by the ‘home position
Parameter adjustment’ and this offset position becomes
This is a value for determining operating the work home position.
conditions. This term can be used to indicate the
kind of value to be set, or the set value itself. Position Zone Output
This is the setting menu for data acquisition When the ram tip is within a set position range,
when the press is operating. this function will turn a specified relay ON.
Each unit has one setting and it affects all
operating programs. Settings are made using Power Source
JP-S Designer.  Refer to Electrical Power Source
“Monitor I/O Renewal Period”, “Result Data
Saving Mode”, “Differential Judgment Sampling Power Supply
Interval” can all be set. The power supply that feeds the motor and
drives the ram.
PID Control The current is either 3 phase or single phase,
One kind of feedback control method where AC180 – 250V.
control of the input values is done through three While the power source is being fed, the ram
elements, namely the variance, integration and can be operated. In addition, when this is ON,
differentiation between the target value and the the ram operation power source condition’ of
output value. the special relay is ON.
PLC Pressing
The control device into which CPU and memory is Describes the period the motor drives the ram
built in. Connects to another device and handles from the position where the step begins, until
signals and the sending and receiving and data the pressing completion conditions are met or,
Abbreviation of ‘Programmable Logic Controller’ the position or load limit is exceeded. The
operational parameters are determined by the
Port pressing mode set for that given step.
With TCP/IP communication (interfacing), this is  Pressing mode
the support address set under the IP address. It  Step
is set when there are multiple Ethernet
interfaces in one device. Pressing Mode
Although it has a range from 0 to 65535, with A type of ram function (ways of moving and
the JP-S “10028: Result Data Acquisition” and stopping) in the step. 9 types exist and 1 type of
“10029: I/O Memory Control” can be used. operation mode is specified in each step.
The usage mode is determined by a
Position Offset combination of the parameters that control the
This parameter offsets against the mechanical ram workings (speed, load) and the operation
initialization position. When this parameter is completion items (speed, load and time etc.)
set, it offsets against the set distance for the

Pressing time hold Programs can be created and edited using
This indicates the designated interval of time JP-S Designer or the program creation register.
when the ram holds after pressing Refer to: “3. Program Runs”
 Pressing operation
Program Data
Pressing Speed The collective term for the setting data used to
The speed at which the ram moves during operate the program.
pressing.
Program Home Position
Probing One of the program setting types. After the ram
When a program is run, this is the low speed finishes pressing, it returns to this position and
movement between the point where the ram stops running. However, when the program is
reaches the position to begin pressing (end of set so that the ram does not return, then it will
approach) until the sensor detects the point not do so.
where the ram touches the work piece (point of In addition, when the “move to program home
contact). However, when there is no approach position” command in the special relay/register
in the program, the ram begins this operation as is used, then the ram will move to the home
soon as the program begins. position for that program.
Enabling/disabling probing in the program as
well as various movement parameters are 【Q】
included in the program data. Quality Control Data
The data recorded for each parameter when
Probing Enabled/Disabled running a program.
The setting that is included in the program data The following parameters are recorded:
that decides whether the probing occurs or not. • Date and time program is run
The settings are the below 2 types. The default • Number of steps
setting is ‘Enabled’. • Judgment results
Enabled: After approach is complete, the ram • Work touching position/load
begins to probe before pressing. • Program end position/load
Disabled: The ram starts pressing immediately • Program operating results
after completing approach. When the JP-S main unit is in “Result Data
Storage Mode”, “Quality Control Data” and
Program “Quality Control Data + Operation Time Series
A group of settings related to a series of Data” are stored and the result values can be
operations, from the start of operations to the called up on JP-S Sampler or through the
ram’s return to the work home position. It Ethernet.
includes program settings themselves, steps Refer to: Result Data
and Judgments, etc. Each program is identified Time Series Data
by a number from 1 to 512.

【R】 2. One of the methods to set the domain of the
Ram I/O memory. With the address of the 4 digit
This is the name of the part driven up and down of the 16 binary numbers, specify the
(or back and forth) by the motor which presses domain of the 1bit unit. It can have a 0 or a
the workpiece. 1 value, and in order to assign a condition
can be represented by ON/OFF signals.
Ram Protrusion Length 3.
One of the setting items for the “Home Position Relay Type
Adjustment” function, this is the distance from Attributes of the function assigned to I/O
the flange attachment surface to the ram tip. memory. The type of function is the type that
Refer to: Home Position Adjustment specified the assignment destination domain by
the relay address.
Regenerative Resistor  Relay -
The resistor that assimilates the regenerative
energy that is generated during operation of the RS-232C
motor. As the amount of regenerative energy 1. The interface for data exchange with
depends on the size of the load, there is a external devices. Compliant with the US
possibility that assimilation cannot be done with EIA (Electronic Industries Alliance)
the standard regenerative resistor. In this case, standard, this interface is standard
the user should consider fitting an external equipment with the JP-S.
resistor to the JP-S as an option. However, 2. The settings menu for the above interface.
depending on the operating conditions, there is Each machine has one setting which affects
a possibility that even with use of an external programs. The settings are made using
resistor, assimilation is not possible. JP-S Designer.
Reference: Setup and Maintenance Refer to “5.3 Digital Input/Output (DIO)
”3.11 Regenerative Resistor” Settings”
Register Result Data

This is a method for I/O memory domain The value of the result of a program that has
designation. It designates domains in 2 bit units been run. It consists of the time series data
through 3 digit hexadecimal addresses. It is combined with the quality control data. After a
used for data exchanges of numerical values, program is run, the result data is stored in the
etc. main unit’s memory. Once the data is output
externally, it is erased from the main unit’s
Relay memory. The memory can store up to 490bytes
1. A device in which the opening/closing of the of result data.
electric circuit occurs. By the receiving of  Time series data
the electric signal, the increase/decrease of  Quality control data
the electric current, the signal will
communicate ON/OFF.

Return but instead monitor the fluctuation of load values
During a program, this is the action of the ram as a specific behavior of the JP-S.
moving back to the home position after it finishes
pressing. Enable/disable, as well as operational Sampling Interval
parameters are included in the program data. This is the interval where a value is taken
during sampling.
Return Enabled/Disabled
Included in the program data, this setting Sampling file
determines whether or not the press will make a When using the JP-S Sampler this file saves
return movement. It operates as described the result data received from the press.
below. There are two settings, with “Enabled” Designate the file saving location and file name
as the default setting. and the file is created automatically. From then
Enabled: After pressing, the ram returns to the on, incoming data is written onto this file.
program home position. The file extension is “.csv”.
Disabled: After pressing, the program ends.
Servo ON
Return to Home Position A state in which the motor is being supplied with
The function that moves the ram to the home electrical power.
position and resets the encoder of the motor.
This must be performed one time after power is Servo OFF
switched ON. A state in which the motor is not being supplied
However, this does not need to be performed a with electrical power.
second time after the power to the drive motor
is shut OFF. This is because the encoder Sensor Load Value
confirms the position of the ram even when the This value is the result of a load calibration
power to the drive motor is OFF. made against the load detected by the load cell.
The final load value is determined by adding the
Running a program ‘load offset value’ to this value.
This is the actual carrying out of the operations  Load offset value
set in a given program. When the I/O memory  Load calibration
(relay) in which the “Program Run Command”
function becomes 1 the program is carried out. Slave
A term used to refer to a lower device of the
【S】 Fieldbus network that receives control
Sampling commands from the master.
A method of monitoring the load value by taking
values at fixed intervals. Setting Data
The values taken are sent to an external device Collective term for data that controls JP-S
as time series data. In addition, some of the functions, program data, and interface settings.
Judgments are not of the load values themselves,

In JP-S, editing, the sending and receiving of This function is for increasing hold load accuracy,
data can be performed. and at the point where the ram reaches the set
position, its pressing speed slows to 0.2m/s.
Shot Refer to “3.4.2 Slow Down Load Rate/Stop
The unit that describes how many times the Reference Position”
program is run
Stop Time
Special Relay/Special Register This is one of the setting parameters in a step.
A function to receive control commands from an When the ram reaches the position which fulfills
external device as well as output data to an the condition to stop pressing, the ram stops for
external device. An external interface domain the duration of time set in this parameter.
address is assigned and used.
Refer to: “4.2 Special Relay/Special Register” Strobe
An instantaneous input/output signal with a
Step short input/output time; with the JP-S this refers
The data used for the approach, work after to a signal that is output in time with changes to
probing, pressing and pressing time hold. Up to the data.
512 steps can be set for one program. When
pressing is done in multiple steps, it is referred Supplementary Digits
to as a multi-step program. When all steps are The method used to display negative figures on
executed, the press transitions to a return the binary chart. Regarding the given 2 binary
movement. numerical values (n bit), where the first bit is 1
Various pressing modes can be set for a step, and the remaining bits are all 0 (if n=8
and the control parameters are determined by 100000000) and has one more digit than the
the mode type. number of bits, the number that is subtracted
Refer to: Pressing (pressurization) from the original number is said.
Pressing Time Hold The original binary numerical values are
Pressing Mode handled as a value that has a negative symbol
Functions “3.4 Step” attached.
In JP-S, in order to fill in a negative value, this
Step Sensor method is used.
The sensor Judgment set to a step. There are
17 different parameters for setting Judgment 【T】
types and ranges. TCP/IP Protocol
Up to 16 settings can be made for each step. The protocol standardly used on the
Refer to: Step Internet/interface agreement. Interfacing with
Judgment the JP-S Ethernet also uses this agreement.
Functions “3.5 Step Sensor” TCP: Transmission Control Protocol (sending
control protocol)
Stop Reference Position IP: Internet Protocol (Internet Protocol)
This is a parameter used with Constant
Speed/Set Load Hold, was well as Constant Time Series Data
Speed/Additional Load Hold Modes, its unit is The position and load value data recorded for
mm. each sampling interval (5mm/sec.) In the

settings for the main unit the “Result Data 2. This is an I/O memory distribution function.
Saving Mode” saves data as “Quality Control It is used by distributing relay numbers. It is
Data + Operational Time Series Data” and the a signal for indicating that a warning has
values can be selected using JP-S Sampler come up. When a warning comes up it
software or through Ethernet interfacing. turns ON, and when the cause of the
Refer to: Result Data warning is removed, it turns OFF.
Quality Control Data Refer to “4.2.2 Common Function (2)
Errors”
Trip
When a load that exceeds the motor power is Word
applied, the power supply is automatically cut. It Unit of the electronic data. Signifies a 16 digit
is a function to prevent motor burnout due to binary number. When using decimal numbers, it
excess current or overheating. can be represented by numbers 0~65536
without using a code.
【U】 1 word = 16 bits = 2 bytes
Upper limit NG The I/O memory register has the domain for
When a program is run and the result values one word.
are above the (sensor) Judgment range, Refer to: Byte
resulting in NG. Bit
Refer to: (sensor) Judgment
Touching Position
【W】 One of the quality control data. The coordinate
Warning value at the point when the pressing operation
1. This is an alarm to indicate an abnormality starts.
not directly connected to a breakdown. If it
appears, it is still possible to run a program. Touching Load
Using the “Warning Number”, it is possible 1. The parameter is a ‘probing’ function
to identify the content of the trouble. parameter in which at the time of the
The “Warning Number” that comes up can probing operation, it switches to pressing
be confirmed using the fault diagnosis once it reaches the load set in this
function of JP-S Designer or “Alarm parameter.
Warning 1” of the special register.  Refer to probing
When a warning occurs, the “Warning” 2. This is one datum used for quality control. It
special relay comes ON. In addition, LED2 is the load value at the point where the ram
on the controller’s front panel starts blinking starts pressing.
and LED3 turns off. When the cause of the Refer to: Quality Control Data
warning is removed, the warning status is
canceled.
Refer to: Setup and Maintenance “5.2 Error
Number List”

Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd.
Industrial Equipment Sales Division
1463 Hazama-machi, Hachioji-shi, Tokyo 193-0941, Japan
Tel: +81-42-661-6301
Fax: +81-42-661-6302
E-mail: j-industry@gm.janome.co.jp
Machine specifications may be modified without prior notice to improve quality.

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form, including photocopying, reprinting, or
translation into another language, without the prior written consent of JANOME.
This manual corresponds with the system software V7.0.x and PC software V7.0.x.
Electro Press is a trademark of Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd.

©2010 – 2017, Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd., All rights reserved.
140813104 as of 2017-05
Japanese Ver. 2017-05

Janome PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Janome PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

JANOME ELECTRO PRESS

Thank you for purchasing a Janome Electro Press.

 Before using this press, read this manual thoroughly and

 After reading this manual, store in a safe place that can be

 This manual is written according to IEC 62079.

 This controller is in accordance with IEC61800-5-1.

Functions 1 Electro Press JP-S

Functions 2 Electro Press JP-S

Functions 3 Electro Press JP-S

Functions 4 Electro Press JP-S

Functions 5 Electro Press JP-S

・・・・・Be sure to follow the safety guidelines detailed here・・・・・

 Symbols that indicate the level of danger and/or damage.

Warning This symbol indicates a risk of serious injury or death.

This symbol indicates the possibility of serious injury or damage

Indicates caution must be taken

Take Caution (General Precaution)

Indicates a forbidden action

Never do this (General Prohibition)

Do not disassemble, modify or repair.

Do not touch (Contact Prohibition)

Indicates a required action

Be sure to follow instructions (General Requirement)

Be sure to unplug the power supply cord

Make sure the machine is grounded

Functions 6 Electro Press JP-S

Set up safety guards.

Make sure to install a safety interlock.

• Install the controller within an industrial control panel.

Functions 7 Electro Press JP-S

Do not use the press where flammable or corrosive gas is present.

Functions 8 Electro Press JP-S

Functions 9 Electro Press JP-S

JP-S0501-00-100 JP-S0501-00-150 JP-S0501-00-250 JP-S0501-00-350

JP-S1001-00-100 JP-S1001-00-150 JP-S1001-00-250

Functions 10 Electro Press JP-S

JP-S2001-00-300 JP-S2001-00-350 JP-S2001-00-400 JP-S1501-00-450

Functions 11 Electro Press JP-S

JP-S3001-00-100 JP-S3001-00-200 JP-S3001-00-300

Functions 12 Electro Press JP-S

NOTE: Standard specification examples.

JP-S5001-00-200 JP-S5001-00-300 JP-S5001-00-400

Functions 13 Electro Press JP-S

NOTE: Standard specification examples. 365

JP-S5R01-00-100 JP-S5R01-00-200 JP-S5R01-00-300

Functions 14 Electro Press JP-S

Functions 15 Electro Press JP-S

Functions 16 Electro Press JP-S

Before performing a run or operation, always check the following:

Functions 17 Electro Press JP-S

Be sure to use the unit within its rated current range.

Functions 18 Electro Press JP-S

Do not block or cover the controller’s cooling fan.

Functions 19 Electro Press JP-S

Functions 20 Electro Press JP-S

Functions 21 Electro Press JP-S

Regularly replace the back-up battery in the controller.

Use the unit in an environment where no electrical noise is present.

Do not drop or jar the unit during transport and/or installation.

Functions 22 Electro Press JP-S

Use the press in an indoor environment where it is not exposed to direct

The controller should be installed inside an industrial control panel.

Do not use the Electro Press in an environment that is damp or dusty.